0% found this document useful (0 votes)

9 views

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide (7)

The document is a Global Guide for the InteliLite 4 AMF 25 controller, detailing its installation, operation, and maintenance. It includes sections on system overview, applications, wiring, controller setup, communication, technical data, and an appendix. The guide is intended for operators, control panel builders, and anyone involved with gen-set management, emphasizing safety and compatibility warnings.

Uploaded by

Bhuneshwar Prasad

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

9 views

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide (7)

Uploaded by

Bhuneshwar Prasad

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 680

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4
AMF 25
Controller for single gen-set
applications

SW version 1.0.0
1 Document information 5
2 System overview 10
3 Applications overview 20
4 Installation and wiring 22
5 Controller setup 58
6 Communication 172
7 Technical data 200
8 Appendix 201

Copyright © 2020 ComAp a.s.

Written by Jan Liptak
Prague, Czech Republic
ComAp a.s., U Uranie 1612/14a,
170 00 Prague 7, Czech Republic
Tel: +420 246 012 111
E-mail: [email protected], www.comap-control.com Global Guide
Table of contents
1 Document information 5 2.6.6 IGL-RA15 19
1.1 Clarification of Notation 5
3 Applications overview 20
1.2 About this Global Guide 5
3.1 AMF – Automatic Mains Failure Start 20
1.3 Legal notice 5
3.2 MRS – Manual Remote Start 20
1.4 General warnings 7
1.4.1 Remote control and programing 7 4 Installation and wiring 22
1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility 7 4.1 Package content 22
1.4.3 Dangerous voltage 7 4.2 Controller installation 22
1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints 7 4.2.1 Dimensions 22
1.5 Functions and protections 8 4.2.2 Mounting 23
1.6 Certifications and standards 8 4.3 Terminal Diagram 24
1.7 Document history 8 4.4 Recommended wiring 25
1.8 Symbols in this manual 9 4.4.1 General 26
4.4.2 Grounding 26
2 System overview 10
4.4.3 Power supply 26
2.1 General description 10
4.4.4 Measurement wiring 28
2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 4 10
4.4.5 Magnetic pick-up 45
2.2 True RMS measurement 10
4.4.6 Binary inputs 46
2.3 Configurability and monitoring 11
4.4.7 Binary Outputs 47
2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring
tools 11 4.4.8 Emergency stop 48

2.3.2 Configuration parts 11 4.4.9 Analog inputs 49

2.4 PC Tools 13 4.4.10 CAN bus and RS485 wiring 51

2.4.1 InteliConfig 13 4.4.11 USB 55

2.4.2 WebSupervisor 13 4.4.12 USB HOST 55

2.4.3 WinScope 14 4.5 Plug-in module installation 55

2.5 Plug-in Modules 14 4.5.1 Installation 55

2.5.1 CM-Ethernet 14 4.6 Maintenance 56

2.5.2 CM-4G-GPS 15 4.6.1 Backup battery replacement 56

2.5.3 CM-RS232-485 15
5 Controller setup 58
2.5.4 EM-BIO8-EFCP 15
5.1 Default configuration 58
2.6 CAN modules 16
5.1.1 Binary inputs 58
2.6.1 Inteli IO8/8 16
5.1.2 Binary outputs 58
2.6.2 Inteli AIN8 17
5.1.3 Analog inputs 58
2.6.3 Inteli AIN8TC 17
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools
2.6.4 Inteli AIO9/1 18 connection 59
2.6.5 IGS-PTM 18 5.2.1 USB 59

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 2

5.2.2 RS232/RS485 60 5.5.20 Load shedding 123
5.2.3 Ethernet 61 5.5.21 Sensor curves 124
5.3 Operator Guide 64 5.5.22 Protections 125
5.3.1 Front panel elements 64 5.5.23 PLC 142
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure 66 5.5.24 Geo-fencing 149
5.3.3 Browsing alarms 79 5.5.25 Tier 4 Final 150
5.3.4 Login 80 5.5.26 Alternate configuration 152
5.3.5 Information screen 83 5.5.27 USB host 153
5.3.6 Language selection 84 5.5.28 E-Stop 157
5.3.7 Display contrast adjustment 85 5.5.29 ECU Frequency selection 158
5.4 Remote Display 85 5.5.30 User Buttons 158
5.4.1 General description 85 5.5.31 User management and data access
5.4.2 IL4-RD Firmware installation 86 control 160

5.4.3 Wiring 86 5.5.32 User setpoints 166

5.4.4 Interconnection variants 87 5.5.33 Cybernetic security 167

5.4.5 Connection process 89

6 Communication 172
5.4.6 Connection troubleshooting 89
6.1 PC 172
5.4.7 Function description 89
6.1.1 Direct communication 172
5.4.8 Firmware compatibility 90
6.1.2 Remote communication 174
5.5 Functions 90
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 186
5.5.1 Start-stop sequence 91
6.2.1 SNMP 186
5.5.2 AMF sequence 93
6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 188
5.5.3 Operating Modes 93
5.5.4 Engine start 95 7 Technical data 200
5.5.5 Stabilization 100
8 Appendix 201
5.5.6 Connecting to load 101
8.1 Controller objects 201
5.5.7 MRS operation 101
8.1.1 List of controller objects types 201
5.5.8 AMF operation 101
8.1.2 Setpoints 201
5.5.9 Dual Operation 102
8.1.3 Values 401
5.5.10 Engine cool down and stop 105
8.1.4 Logical binary inputs 470
5.5.11 History log 106
8.1.5 Logical binary outputs 492
5.5.12 Breaker control 107
8.1.6 Logical analog inputs 541
5.5.13 Exercise timers 110
8.1.7 PLC 551
5.5.14 Rental Timers 117
8.1.8 Fixed Protection States 562
5.5.15 Service timers 118
8.1.9 User Protection States 567
5.5.16 Analog switches 118
8.2 Alarms 570
5.5.17 Additional running engine indications 119
8.2.1 Alarm levels in the controller 570
5.5.18 Voltage phase sequence detection 120
8.2.2 Alarms level 1 570
5.5.19 Gen-set operation states 120
8.2.3 Alarms level 2 609

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 3

8.2.4 Fail sensor and other types 635
8.3 Modules 636
8.3.1 Plug-in modules 636
8.3.2 CAN modules 648
6 back to Table of contents

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 4

DRAFT!

1 Document information
1.1 Clarification of Notation 5
1.2 About this Global Guide 5
1.3 Legal notice 5
1.4 General warnings 7
1.5 Functions and protections 8
1.6 Certifications and standards 8
1.7 Document history 8
1.8 Symbols in this manual 9

6 back to Table of contents

1.1 Clarification of Notation

Note: This type of paragraph calls the reader’s attention to a notice or related theme.

IMPORTANT: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or improper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.

Example: This type of paragraph contains information that is used to illustrate how a specific function
works.

1.2 About this Global Guide

This manual contains important instructions for InteliLite 4 controllers family that shall be followed during
installation and maintenance of the controllers.
This manual provides general information how to install and operate InteliLite 4 controllers.
This manual is dedicated for:
Operators of Gen-sets
Gen-set cControl panel builders
For everybody who is concerned with installation, operation and maintenance of the Gen-set

1.3 Legal notice

This End User's Guide/Manual as part of the Documentation is an inseparable part of ComAp’s Product and
may be used exclusively according to the conditions defined in the “END USER or Distributor LICENSE
AGREEMENT CONDITIONS – COMAP CONTROL SYSTEMS SOFTWARE” (License Agreement) and/or in
the “ComAp a.s. Global terms and conditions for sale of Products and provision of Services” (Terms) and/or in
the “Standardní podmínky projektů komplexního řešení ke smlouvě o dílo, Standard Conditions for Supply of
Complete Solutions” (Conditions) as applicable.
ComAp’s License Agreement is governed by the Czech Civil Code 89/2012 Col., by the Authorship Act
121/2000 Col., by international treaties and by other relevant legal documents regulating protection of the
intellectual properties (TRIPS).
The End User and/or ComAp’s Distributor shall only be permitted to use this End User's Guide/Manual with
ComAp Control System Registered Products. The Documentation is not intended and applicable for any other
purpose.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 5

DRAFT!

Official version of the ComAp’s End User's Guide/Manual is the version published in English. ComAp reserves
the right to update this End User's Guide/Manual at any time. ComAp does not assume any responsibility for its
use outside of the scope of the Terms or the Conditions and the License Agreement.
Licensed End User is entitled to make only necessary number of copies of the End User's Guide/Manual. Any
translation of this End User's Guide/Manual without the prior written consent of ComAp is expressly prohibited!
Even if the prior written consent from ComAp is acquired, ComAp does not take any responsibility for the
content, trustworthiness and quality of any such translation. ComAp will deem a translation equal to this End
User's Guide/Manual only if it agrees to verify such translation. The terms and conditions of such verification
must be agreed in the written form and in advance.
For more details relating to the Ownership, Extent of Permitted Reproductions Term of Use of the
Documentation and to the Confidentiality rules please review and comply with the ComAp’s License
Agreement, Terms and Conditions available on www.comap-control.com.
Security Risk Disclaimer
Pay attention to the following recommendations and measures to increase the level of security of ComAp
products and services.
Please note that possible cyber-attacks cannot be fully avoided by the below mentioned recommendations and
set of measures already performed by ComAp, but by following them the cyber-attacks can be considerably
reduced and thereby to reduce the risk of damage. ComAp does not take any responsibility for the actions of
persons responsible for cyber-attacks, nor for any damage caused by the cyber-attack. However, ComAp is
prepared to provide technical support to resolve problems arising from such actions, including but not limited to
restoring settings prior to the cyber-attacks, backing up data, recommending other preventive measures against
any further attacks.
Warning: Some forms of technical support may be provided against payment. There is no legal or factual
entitlement for technical services provided in connection to resolving problems arising from cyber-attack or
other unauthorized accesses to ComAp's Products or Services.
General security recommendations and set of measures
1. AccessCode
• Change the AccessCode BEFORE the device is connected to a network.
• Use a secure AccessCode – ideally a random string of 8 characters containing lowercase, uppercase letters
and digits.
• For each device use a different AccessCode.
2. Password
• Change the password BEFORE the device enters a regular operation.
• Do not leave displays or PC tools unattended if an user, especially administrator, is logged in.
3. Controller Web interface
• The controller web interface at port TCP/80 is based on http, not https, and thus it is intended to be used only
in closed private network infrastructures.
• Avoid exposing the port TCP/80 to the public Internet.
4. MODBUS/TCP
• The MODBUS/TCP protocol (port TCP/502) is an instrumentation protocol designed to exchange data
between locally connected devices like sensors, I/O modules, controllers etc. From it’s nature it does not
contain any kind of security – neither encryption nor authentication. Thus it is intended to be used only in closed
private network infrastructures.
• Avoid exposing the port TCP/502 to the public Internet.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 6

DRAFT!

5. SNMP
• The SNMP protocol (port UDP/161) version 1,2 is not encrypted. Thus it is intended to be used only in closed
private network infrastructures.
• Avoid exposing the port UDP/161 to the public Internet.
Used Open Source Software: mBed-TLS
https://www.mbed.com/en/development/software/mbed-tls/
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Used Font: zpix-pixel-font
WEBLINK to the license conditions: https://github.com/SolidZORO/zpix-pixel-font
Copyright (c) [2019] [Jason Fung]

1.4 General warnings

1.4.1 Remote control and programing
Controller can be remotely controlled. In the event that maintenance of Gen-set has to be done, or controller has
to be programmed, check the following points to ensure that the engine cannot be started or any other parts of
the system cannot be effected.
To be sure:
Disconnect remote control
Disconnect binary outputs

1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility

Be aware to use proper combination of SW and HW versions.

1.4.3 Dangerous voltage

In no case touch the terminals for voltage and current measurement!
Always connect grounding terminals!
In any case do not disconnect controller CT terminals!

1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints

All parameters are adjusted to their typical values. However the setpoints has to be checked and adjusted to
their real values before the first starting of the Gen-set.
IMPORTANT: Wrong adjustment of setpoints can destroy the Gen-set.

Note: The controller contains a large number of configurable setpoints, because of this it is impossible to
describe all of its functions. Some functions can be changed or have different behavior in different SW versions.
Always check the Global guide and New feature list for SW version which is used in controller. This manual
only describes the product and is not guaranteed to be set for your application.

IMPORTANT: Be aware that the binary outputs can change state during and after software
reprogramming (before the controller is used again ensure that the proper configuration and
setpoint settings are set in the controller).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 7

DRAFT!

The following instructions are for qualified personnel only. To avoid personal injury do not perform any action not
specified in related guides for product.

1.5 Functions and protections

Support of functions and protections as defined by ANSI (American National Standards Institute):

Description ANSI code Description ANSI code

Voltage unbalance / Negative
Master unit 1 47
sequence voltage
Stopping device 5 Incomplete sequence relay 48
Multi-function device 11 Overcurrent 50/50TD
Overspeed 12 Earth fault** 50G
Underspeed 14 Overcurrent IDMT 51
Starting-to-running transition contractor 19 AC circuit breaker 52
Thermal relay 26 Overvoltage 59
Undervoltage 27 Pressure switch 63
Annunciator 30 Liquid level switch 71
Overload (real power) 32P Alarm relay*** 74
Reverse power 32R Reclosing relay 79
Master sequence device 34 Overfrequency 81O
Unit sequence starting* 44 Underfrequency 81U
Current unbalance 46 Auto selective control/transfer 83

*Dual-operation **Extension module EM-BIO8-EFCP required *** extension module IGL-RA15 required

1.6 Certifications and standards

EN 61000-6-2 EN 60068-2-6 (2÷25 Hz / ±1,6 mm; 25÷100 Hz / 4.0 g)
2
EN 61000-6-4 EN 60068-2-27 (a=500 m/s ; T=6 ms)
EN 61010-1 EN 60068-2-30:2005 25/55°C, RH 95%, 48hours

EN 60068-2-1 (-20 °C/16 h for std, -40 °C/16 EN 60529 (front panel IP65, back side IP20)
h for LT version)
EN 60068-2-2 (70 °C/16 h)

1.7 Document history

Revision number Related sw. version Date Author
1 1.0.0 1.10.2020 Jan Liptak

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 8

1.8 Symbols in this manual

Connector - Resistor
3 x Phases Grounding
male adjustable

Active Resistive
current Contact GSM sensor
sensor RPTC
GSM RS 232
Contactor
AirGate modem male

Controller RS 232
IG-AVRi
Alternating simplified female
current
Module IG-AVRi
Starter
Analog simplified TRANS
modem
Switch -
Current
Jumper manually
measuring
Battery operated

Current
Load Transformer
Binary measuring
output
USB type B
Diode Mains male
Breaker
contact
Ethernet USB type B
Mains female
Breaker male
contact
Voltage
Ethernet Mobile
measuring
female provider
Breaker
Passive Wifi / WAN /
Fuel
current LAN
solenoid
Breaker sensor
6 back to Document
information
Fuse Pick - up
Breaker

Fuse switch Relay coil

Capacitor
Relay coil of
Generator slow-
Coil
operating
Generator
Connector - schematic Resistor
female

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 9

DRAFT!

2 System overview
2.1 General description 10
2.2 True RMS measurement 10
2.3 Configurability and monitoring 11
2.4 PC Tools 13
2.5 Plug-in Modules 14
2.6 CAN modules 16

6 back to Table of contents

2.1 General description

InteliLite 4 Family controllers are is comprehensive Gen-set controllers for single Gen-sets operating in stand-by
(MRS) or back-up (AMF) or parallel modes or for multiple Gen-sets applications. A modular construction allows
upgrades to different levels of complexity in order to provide the best solution for various customer applications.
The controllers are equipped with a powerful graphic display showing icons, symbols and bar graphs for intuitive
operation, which, together with its high level of functionality, sets new standards in Gen-set controls.
InteliLite 4 controller is comprehensive Gen-set controller for single Gen-sets operating in stand-by (MRS) or
back-up (AMF) applications. A modular construction allows upgrades to different levels of complexity in order to
provide the best solution for various customer applications. The controller is equipped with a powerful graphic
display showing icons, symbols and bar graphs for intuitive operation, which, together with its high level of
functionality, sets new standards in Gen-set controls.
InteliLite 4 controller is comprehensive mains supervision controller for multiple generating sets operating in
parallel to the Mains. A modular construction allows upgrades to different levels of complexity in order to provide
the best solution for various customer applications. Controllers are equipped with a powerful graphic display
showing icons, symbols and bar-graphs for intuitive operation, which sets, together with high functionality, new
standards in Mains controls.
The controller automatically connects the group of Gen-sets to the Mains. It features mains failure detection
using integrated Mains protections, MCB and MGCB synchronization, configuration level switches based on
Mains import or object consumption.
The controller automatically connects and synchronizes two parts of bus bar and controls the bus tie circuit
breaker (BTB).
The controller provides easy-to-use operation and installation. Predefined configurations for typical applications
are available as well as user-defined configurations for special applications.

2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 4

Easy-to-use operation and installation. The factory default configuration covers most applications
Various customizations are possible thanks to its configurability
Excellent remote communication capabilities
High level of support for EFI engines (most world producers)
High reliability

2.2 True RMS measurement

This controller measures AC values based on True RMS principle. This principle corresponds exactly to the
physical definition of alternating voltage effective values. Under normal circumstances the mains voltage

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 10

DRAFT!

should have a pure sinusoidal waveform. However some nonlinear elements connected to the mains produce
harmonic waveforms with frequencies of multiplies of the basic mains frequency and this may result in
deformation of the voltage waveforms. The True RMS measurement gives accurate readings of effective values
not only for pure sinusoidal waveforms, but also for deformed waveforms.
Note: The harmonic deformation causes that the Power Factor of a generator working parallel with the mains
cannot reach values in a certain range around the PF 1.00. The higher the deformation, the wider the power
factor dead range. If the requested power factor is adjusted inside the dead range, the controller cannot reach
the requested value because of this fact.

2.3 Configurability and monitoring

One of the key features of the controller is the system's high level of adaptability to the needs of each individual
application and wide possibilities for monitoring. This can be achieved by configuring and using the powerful
PC/mobile tools.

2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools

InteliConfig – complete configuration and single Gen-set monitoring
WebSupervisor – web-based system for monitoring and controlling
WebSupervisor mobile – supporting application for smart-phones
WinScope – special graphical monitoring software

Note: Use the InteliConfig PC software to read, view and modify configuration from the controller or disk and
write the new configuration to the controller or disk.

The firmware of controller contains a large number of binary inputs and outputs needed for all necessary
functions available. However, not all functions are required at the same time on the same Gen-set and also the
controller hardware does not have so many input and output terminals. One of the main tasks of the
configuration is mapping of "logical" firmware inputs and outputs to the "physical" hardware inputs and outputs.

2.3.2 Configuration parts

Mapping of logical binary inputs (functions) or assigning alarms to physical binary input terminals
Mapping of logical binary outputs (functions) to physical binary output terminals
Assigning sensor characteristics (curves) and alarms to analog inputs
Selection of peripheral modules, which are connected to the controller, and doing the same (as mentioned
above) for them
Selection of ECU type, if an ECU is connected
Changing the language of the controller interface

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 11

DRAFT!

Image 2.1 Principle of binary inputs and outputs configuration

The controller is shipped with a default configuration, which should be suitable for most standard applications.
This default configuration can be changed only by using a PC with the InteliConfig software. See InteliConfig
documentation for details.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 12

DRAFT!

Note: You need one of communication modules to connect the controller to a PC with InteliConfig. There is a
special easy removable service module for cases when no communication module is permanently attached.

Once the configuration is modified, it can be saved to a file for later usage with another controller or for backup
purposes. The file is called archive and has the file extension .ail3. An archive contains a full image of the
controller at the time of saving (if the controller is online for the PC) except the firmware. Besides configuration it
also contains current adjustment of all setpoints, all measured values, a copy of the history log and a copy of the
alarm list.
The archive can be simply used for cloning controllers, i.e. preparing controllers with identical configuration and
settings.

The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 analog inputs.

Supported sensors:
Resistor 3-wire input
Common resistor: 0-250 Ω, 0-2400 Ω, 0-
10 kΩ
Temperature sensor: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100,
Ni1000
Current (active or passive sensors)
±20 mA, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Voltage
±1 V, 0-2.4 V, 0-5 V, 0-10 V
Lambda probes
Thermocouples are not supported (the
measuring loop was designed for lambda
probes, what caused non-support of
thermocouples)
Impulse/RPM sensor:
RPM measuring pulses with frequency 4 Hz-
10 kHz
Impulse
Possibility to measure pulses from
electrometer, flowmeter (measurement of
total consumption, average fuel
consumption)

2.6.3 Inteli AIN8TC

8 Analog Channels Module. The unit offers flexibility to configure 8 thermocouple inputs.
8 analog input channels for measuring
temperature by thermocouples

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 17

DRAFT!

2.6.4 Inteli AIO9/1

9 Analog Inputs and 1 Analog Output Module
4× differential voltage inputs for measurement in
range of 0-65 V or -65 V-0 V
4× shielded, galvanically separated ±75 mV
inputs
Resistance analog input 0-2500 Ω
One analog output

2.6.5 IGS-PTM
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, 4 analog
inputs and 1 analog outputs.
Configurable 8 binary and 4 analog inputs
Configurable 8 binary and 1 analog output
LEDs indicate the state of binary inputs/outputs
Measures values from Pt100 and Ni100 sensors
Analog inputs (resistance range 0-250 Ω, voltage
range 0-100 mV, current range 0-20 mA –
selectable via jumper)
UL certified

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 18

DRAFT!

2.6.6 IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator.
15 programmable LEDs with configurable colors
red-green-yellow
Lamp test function with status LED
Customizable labels
Local horn output
Maximal distance 200 m from the controller
Up to 4 units can be connected to the controller
UL certified

6 back to System overview

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 19

DRAFT!

3 Applications overview
3.1 AMF – Automatic Mains Failure Start 20
3.2 MRS – Manual Remote Start 20

6 back to Table of contents

3.1 AMF – Automatic Mains Failure Start

The typical scheme of Automatic Mains Failure Start application is shown below. The controller controls two
breakers – a mains breaker and a generator breaker. Feedback from both breakers isn’t necessary. InteliLite 4
controllers can also work without breaker feedbacks.

Image 3.1 AMF application overview

3.2 MRS – Manual Remote Start

The typical scheme of Manual Remote Start application is shown below. The controller controls one breaker – a
generator breaker. Feedback from breaker isn’t necessary. InteliLite 4 controllers can also work without breaker
feedback.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 20

DRAFT!

Image 3.2 MRS application overview

6 back to Applications overview

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 21

DRAFT!

4 Installation and wiring

4.1 Package content 22
4.2 Controller installation 22
4.3 Terminal Diagram 24
4.4 Recommended wiring 25
4.5 Plug-in module installation 55
4.6 Maintenance 56

6 back to Table of contents

4.1 Package content

The package contains:
Controller
Mounting holders
Terminal blocks

Note: The package does not contain a communication or extension modules. The required modules should be
ordered separately.

4.2 Controller installation

4.2.1 Dimensions

① Plug-in module
Note: Dimension x depends on plug-in module

Note: Dimensions are in millimeters and are the same for all versions of InteliLite.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 22

DRAFT!

4.2.2 Mounting
The controller is to be mounted onto the switchboard door. Requested cutout size is 172 mm × 112 mm. Use the
screw holders delivered with the controller to fix the controller into the door as described on pictures below.
Recommended torque for holders is 0.15 N·m.

Panel door mounting

Note: Enclosure Type rating with mounting instruction – For use on a Flat surface of a type 1 enclosure.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 23

DRAFT!

4.3 Terminal Diagram

① GENERATOR ② GENERATOR ③ MAINS VOLTAGE ④ BINARY INPUTS
CURRENT VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT
MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT
T29 COM T37 N T41 N T45 BI1
T30 L1 T38 L1 T42 L1 T46 BI2
T31 L2 T39 L2 T43 L2 T47 BI3
T32 L3 T40 L3 T44 L3 T48 BI4
T49 BI5
T50 BI6
T51 BI7
T52 BI8

Image 4.1 Terminal diagram for InteliLite 4 AMF 25

⑤ CAN1 ⑥ ANALOG INPUTS ⑦ BINARY OUTPUTS ⑨ POWER SUPPLY,

D+
T25 L T23 +5V T12 BO8 T01 BATT -
T26 COM T22 AI4 T11 BO7 T02 D+
T27 H T21 AI3 T10 BO6 T03 BATT +
T20 AI2 T09 BO5 ⑩ RS485
T19 AI1 T08 BO4 B
T18 ACOM T07 BO3 COM
T17 IN T06 BO2 A
T16 COM T05 BO1 ⑪ USB
⑧ E-STOP ⑫ USB HOST
T04

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 24

DRAFT!

4.4 Recommended wiring

Current inputs 39-42 Current measurement wiring (page 29)

Voltage measurement AMF wiring (page 32)

Generator voltage inputs 37-40
Voltage measurement MRS wiring (page 39)

Mains voltage inputs 41-44 Voltage measurement AMF wiring (page 32)

Binary inputs 45-52 Binary inputs (page 46)

CAN1 H, COM, L CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 51)

Analog inputs 16-23 Analog inputs (page 49)

Binary Outputs (page 47)

Binary outputs 04-12 Note: T04 is dedicated for Emergency stop
(page 48)

Power supply "+", D, "-" Power supply (page 26)

RS485 A, B, C CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 51)

USB Device USB (page 55)

USB Host USB HOST (page 55)

2
Note: Wiring terminal markings to included tightening torque: 0.5 N-m (4.5 lb-in)., and wire size: 2 mm (12-
26 AWG).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 25

DRAFT!

4.4.1 General
To ensure proper function:
Use grounding terminals.
Wiring for binary inputs and analog inputs must not be run with power cables.
Analog and binary inputs should use shielded cables, especially when the length is more than 3 m.

Tightening torque, allowable wire size and type, for the Field-Wiring Terminals:
For Mains(Bus) Voltage, Generator Voltage and Current terminals

Specified tightening torque is 0.56 Nm (5.0 In-lbs)

use only diameter 2.0 - 0.5 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 90 °C minimum.

For other controller field wiring terminals

Specified tightening torque 0.79 nm (7.0 In-lb)

Use only diameter 2.0 - 0.5 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 75 °C minimum.

Use copper conductors only

4.4.2 Grounding
2
The shortest possible length of wire should be used for controller grounding. Use cable min 2.5 mm .
The negative "–" battery terminal must be properly grounded.
Switchboard and engine must be grounded at common point. Use as short cable as possible to the grounding
point.

4.4.3 Power supply

To ensure proper function:
Use power supply cable min. 1.5 mm2

Maximum continuous DC power supply voltage is 36 V DC. The controller’s power supply terminals are
protected against large pulse power disturbances. When there is a potential risk of the controller being subjected
to conditions outside its capabilities, an outside protection device should be used.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 26

DRAFT!

It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between generator current COM terminal and battery "–"
terminal is maximally ±2 V. Therefore is strongly recommended to interconnect these two terminals together.
Note: The controller should be grounded properly in order to protect against lighting strikes. The maximum
allowable current through the controller's negative terminal is 4 A (this is dependent on binary output load).

For the connections with 12 V DC power supply, the controller includes internal capacitors that allow the
controller to continue in operation during cranking if the batter voltage dip occurs. If the voltage dip goes during
cranking to 0 V and after 50 ms it recovers to 4 V, the controller continues operating. This cycle can repeat
several times. During this voltage dip the controller screen backlight can turn off.

Note: Recommended fusing is 3 A fuse.

Note: In case of the dip to 0 V the high-side binary outputs will be temporarily switched off and after recovering
to 4 V back on.

IMPORTANT: When the controller is power up only by USB and the USB is disconnected then the
actual statistics can be lost.

Note: Suitable conductor protection shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 240.

Note: Low voltage circuits (35 volts or less) shall be supplied from the engine starting battery or an isolated
secondary circuit.

Note: It is also possible to further support the controller by connecting the external capacitor and separating
diode. The capacitor size depends on required time. It shall be approximately thousands of μF. The capacitor
size should be 5 000 μF to withstand 150 ms voltage dip under following conditions: Voltage before dip is 12 V,
after 150 ms the voltage recovers to min. allowed voltage, i.e. 8 V.

Power supply fusing

A 3 A fuse should be connected in-line with the battery positive terminal to the controller and modules. These
items should never be connected directly to the starting battery. Fuse value and type depends on number of
connected devices and wire length. Recommended fuse (not fast) type – T3 A. Not fast due to internal
capacitors charging during power up.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 27

DRAFT!

Note: Recommended fusing is 3 A fuse.

IMPORTANT: 3 A fuse is calculated without BOUT consumption nor extension modules. Real value
of fuse depends on consumption of binary outputs and modules.

Example: Maximal consumption of binary outputs can be 22 A

2 x 10 A on high current outputs (for 10 seconds)
2 A on all others binary outputs

4.4.4 Measurement wiring

2 2
Use 1.5 mm cables for voltage connection and 2.5 mm for current transformers connection. Adjust
Connection type (page 211), Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 214), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 214),
Nominal Current (page 209), Gen VT Ratio (page 216), Mains VT Ratio (page 217) and CT Ratio (page
210) by appropriate setpoints in the Basic Settings group.
IMPORTANT: Risk of personal injury due to electric shock when manipulating voltage terminals
under voltage. Be sure the terminals are not under voltage before touching them.
Do not open the secondary circuit of current transformers when the primary circuit is closed. Open
the primary circuit first.

CT Location

Image 4.2 CT Location

There are three options of CT location.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 28

DRAFT!

a. Load
b. Gen-set
c. None
Note: The current measurement protections are active only when the Gen-set is running.
If the CT Location is set to Load the Short Circuit BOC (page 264) protection is enabled only when GCB is
closed.

Current measurement wiring

The number of CT's is automatically selected based on selected value of setpoint Connection type (page 211)
[3Ph4Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph].
Generator currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is bellow <1 % of CT range.
To ensure proper function:
2
Use cables of 2.5 mm
Use transformers to 5 A
Connect CT according to following drawings:

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal and
power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so interconnect these two terminals.

Note: This wiring is recommended for India market.

Voltage measurement AMF wiring

There are 4 voltage measurement Connection Type (setpoint Connection type (page 211) [3Ph4Wire
/3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph]) options, every type matches to corresponding generator connection type.
Note: For fusing of voltage measurement input use T1A or T2A fuse.

Image 4.13 Typical 3 Phase 3 Wires generator wiring

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 35

DRAFT!

ConnectionType: SplPhL1L2

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

ConnectionType: 3 Phase 4 Wires

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

Image 4.20 3 phase application with neutral

Image 4.21 Typical 3 Phase 4 Wires generator wiring

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 40

DRAFT!

ConnectionType: 3 Phase 3 Wires

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

Image 4.22 3 phase application without neutral

Image 4.23 Typical 3 Phase 3 Wires generator wiring

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 41

DRAFT!

ConnectionType: SplPhL1L2

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

Image 4.28 Mono phase application

Image 4.29 Typical Mono Phase generator wiring

Note: Grey dashed line symbolizes internal connection between E-Stop and binary outputs 1 and 2.

Note: For proper functionality of E-Stop, the terminal T04 must be always wired. Terminal can be connected to
battery+ or to terminal T03 (BATT+)

IMPORTANT: Suppression diodes are not indicated, but required.

The Emergency Stop function can be made in two ways:

Connecting a normally closed “mushroom-type” button to the binary input. This is a purely software solution.
A hard-wired solution, where the button also disconnects the power supply from the controller outputs.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 48

DRAFT!

Image 4.32 Hard-wired emergency stop

IMPORTANT: Suppression diodes are not indicated, but required.

4.4.9 Analog inputs

On each analog input, there is a possibility to connect voltage, current or resistive sensor.
The analog inputs for resistive automotive type sensors like VDO or DATCON are connected either by one wire
(the second pole is the sensor body) or by two wires.

Image 4.33 Wiring of analog sensor

In the case of grounded sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the engine body as near to the sensors as
possible.
In the case of isolated sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the negative power supply terminal of the
controller as well as one pole of each sensor.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 49

DRAFT!

Analog inputs are typically used for: Oil Pressure, Coolant Temperature and Fuel Level. All of these parameters
are connected with relevant protections.

Image 4.34 Grounded sensors Image 4.35 Isolated sensors

Note: Schemes show only analog input connection overview, not actual wiring.

Note: The name, sensor characteristic and alarm types for each analog input have to be assigned during
configuration.

Analog as binary or tristate inputs

Analog inputs can be used also as binary or tri-state, i.e. for contact sensors without or with circuit check. The
threshold level is 750 Ω. In the case of tri-state, values lower than 10 Ω and values over 2400 Ω are evaluated as
sensor failure (short or open circuit).

Image 4.36 Analog inputs as tristate Image 4.37 Analog inputs as binary

Note: The name, sensor characteristic and alarm types for each analog input have to be assigned during
configuration.

Note: Tristate and binary sensors are not suitable for Analog Switch functions.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 50

DRAFT!

4.4.10 CAN bus and RS485 wiring

CAN bus wiring
The wiring of the CAN bus should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:
The maximum length of the CAN bus depends on the communication speed. For a speed of 250 kbps, which
is used on the CAN1 bus (extension modules, ECU), the maximum length is 200 m.
The bus must be wired in linear form with termination resistors at both ends. No nodes are allowed except on
the controller terminals.
Shielded cable1 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the CAN bus line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no
star) is necessary.
The CAN bus has to be terminated by 120Ω resistors at both ends use a cable with following parameters:

Cable type Shielded twisted pair

Impedance 120 Ω
Propagation velocity ≥ 75 % (delay ≤ 4.4 ns/m)
2
Wire crosscut ≥ 0.25 mm
Attenuation (@1MHz) ≤ 2 dB / 100 m

Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.

Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120 Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close the
jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.

Image 4.38 CAN bus topology

1Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 51

DRAFT!

For shorter distances (connection within one building)

Image 4.39 CAN bus wiring for shorter distances

Note: Shielding shall be grounded at one end only. Shielding shall not be connected to CAN COM terminal

For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)

Image 4.40 CAN bus wiring for longer distances

① Recommended PT5-HF-12DC-ST1

RS485 wiring
The wiring of the RS485 communication should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:
Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120 Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close the
jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.

Standard maximum bus length is 1000 m.

Shielded cable2 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the RS485 line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no
star) is necessary.
The line has to be terminated by 120Ω resistors at both ends.

1Protections recommended: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-12DC-ST with PT2x2-

BE (base element) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-012/2 R DJ
2Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 52

DRAFT!

For shorter distances (connection within one building)

Image 4.41 RS485 wiring for shorter distances

For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)

Image 4.42 RS485 wiring for longer distances

① Recommended PT5HF-5DC-ST1
Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.

1Recommended protections: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-5DC-ST with PT2x2-

BE (base element)(or MT-RS485-TTL) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-006/2 R DJ

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 53

DRAFT!

On board RS485 description

Balancing resistors
The transmission bus into the RS485 port enters an indeterminate state when it is not being transmitted to. This
indeterminate state can cause the receivers to receive invalid data bits from the noise picked up on the cable.
To prevent these data bits, you should force the transmission line into a known state. By installing two 620Ω
balancing resistors at one node on the transmission line, you can create a voltage divider that forces the voltage
between the differential pair to be less than 200 mili-Volts, the threshold for the receiver. You should install
these resistors on only one node. The figure below shows a transmission line using bias resistors. Balancing
resistors are placed directly on the PCB of controller. Use jumpers PULL UP/PULL DOWN to connect the
balancing resistors.

Image 4.43 Balancing resistors

Image 4.44 RS485 on board

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 54

DRAFT!

4.4.11 USB
This is required for computer connection. Use the shielded USB A-B cable.

Image 4.45 USB connection

Controller can by also power by USB (only for service purpose like a uploading firmware, change of
configuration etc.).
IMPORTANT: Power supply by USB is only for service purpose. Binary inputs and outputs are in
logical 0. Also plug-in modules are not working.

4.4.12 USB HOST

USB Flash Drive can be connected into USB A connector.
6 back to Recommended wiring

4.5 Plug-in module installation

4.5.1 Installation
Remove the back cover. To do this, press four holders which are located in corners.

After removing back cover insert the plug-in module. Plug-in module has to be inserted under holders. Start with
holders marked by symbol 1. On the controller are also arrows for better navigation. After inserting plug-in
module under holders 1 press it down to holders marked by symbol 2 which locks the module.

5.1.1 Binary inputs
Number Description Configured function
BIN1 Generator circuit breaker feedback GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 481)
BIN2 Mains circuit breaker feedback MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 484)
BIN3 Not Used NOT USED (PAGE 484)
BIN4 Access lock keyswitch ACCESS LOCK (PAGE 472)
BIN5 Switch controller to OFF mode REMOTE OFF (PAGE 488)
BIN6 Switch controller to TEST mode REMOTE TEST (PAGE 490)
BIN7 Suppression of alarms SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 490)
BIN8 Not Used NOT USED (PAGE 484)

5.1.2 Binary outputs

Number Description Function
BOUT1 Starter motor control STARTER 1 (PAGE 536)
BOUT2 Fuel solenoid valve FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 509)
BOUT3 Indication of breaker state GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 511)
BOUT4 Indication of breaker state MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 523)
BOUT5 Activation of any devices before start PRESTART (PAGE 531)
BOUT6 Gen-set can be connected to load READY TO LOAD (PAGE 534)
BOUT7 Indication of unconfirmed alarm ALARM (PAGE 502)
BOUT8 Not Used NOT USED (PAGE 531)

5.1.3 Analog inputs

Number Configured sensor Function
AIN1 VDO 10 Bar OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 550)
AIN2 VDO40-120°C COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 547)
AIN3 VDOLevel % FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 548)
AIN4 Not Used NOT USED (PAGE 549)

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 58

DRAFT!

5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools

connection
5.2.1 USB 59
5.2.2 RS232/RS485 60
5.2.3 Ethernet 61

6 back to Controller setup

This chapter contains brief introduction into the specifics of firmware and archive upload and connection of
various PC tools to the controller. If you require detailed information on each PC tool please use the included
Help in those PC tools or download their Reference Guides.

5.2.1 USB
You may connect to the controller using the USB port. In this case standard USB A to B cable should be used.

Connection using InteliConfig

Image 5.1 First screen of InteliConfig – select connect to controller

Image 5.2 Second screen of InteliConfig – select detected controllers

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 59

DRAFT!

Connection using WinScope

Image 5.3 WinScope screen – select direct connection

5.2.2 RS232/RS485
It is possible to connect to the controller using RS232 or RS485 direct connection (serial port or USB to
RS232/RS485 converter may be used). The following settings need to be checked in the controller:
COM1 Mode (page 377) = Direct
Controller Address has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool

Connection using InteliConfig

Image 5.4 First screen of InteliConfig – select connect to controller

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 60

DRAFT!

Image 5.5 Second screen of InteliConfig – select Serial link

Connection using WinScope

Image 5.6 WinScope screen – select direct connection

Note: WinScope supports only 19200, 38400, 57600 speeds.

5.2.3 Ethernet
It is possible to connect to the controller using Ethernet port either directly or using ComAp's AirGate service.

Direct connection
When you use direct connection the controller needs to be reachable directly from the PC you use (i.e. one LAN
or WAN without any firewalls and other points that may not allow the connection). The following settings need to
be checked in the controller:

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 61

DRAFT!

Controller Address (page 228) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool
IP Address Mode (page 1) can be set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service is available.
Otherwise it needs to be set to FIXED
IP Address (page 1) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Subnet Mask (page 1) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested
Gateway IP (page 1) can be set here when it is used
ComAp TCP Port (page 1) number is 23. Make sure that this port is open for communication in your
network

Connection using InteliConfig

RIGHT button. Use this button to move right or to change the mode. The button
can change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of currently
selected mode is displayed.
Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced by
one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – "Operating modes" chapter.

HORN RESET button. Use this button to deactivate the horn output without
acknowledging the alarms.

FAULT RESET button. Use this button to acknowledge alarms and deactivate
the horn output. Inactive alarms will disappear immediately and status of active
alarms will be changed to "confirmed" so they will disappear as soon as their
reasons dismiss.

UP button. Use this button to move up or increase value.

PAGE button. Use this button to switch over display pages.

DOWN button. Use this button to move down or decrease value.

ENTER button. Use this button to finish editing a setpoint or moving right in the
history page.

START button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the start
sequence of the engine.

STOP button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the stop
sequence of the Gen-set. Repeated pressing of button will cancel current phase
of stop sequence (like cooling) and next phase will continue.

GCB button. Works in MAN and TEST modes only. Press this button to open or
close the GCB.

MCB button. Works in MAN and TEST modes only. Press this button to open or
close the MCB.

Indicators and others

Position Description
GENERATOR status indicator. There are two states – Gen-set OK (indicator is green) and
Gen-set failure (indicator is red). Green LED is on if the generator voltage is present and
within limits. Red LED starts flashing when Gen-set failure occurs. After FAULT RESET
button is pressed, goes to steady light (if an alarm is still active) or is off (if no alarm is active).
MAINS status indicator. There are two states – Mains OK (indicator is green) and Mains
failure (indicator is red). Green LED is on, if mains is present and within limits. Red LED
starts blinking when the mains failure is detected and after the Gen-set has started and
connected to the load it lights permanently until the mains failure disappears.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 65

DRAFT!

Graphic B/W display, 132 × 64 px.

GCB ON. Green LED is on if GCB is closed. It is driven by GCB CLOSE/OPEN output or by
GCB feedback signal.
LOAD. Green LED is ON if load is supplied by mains or by generator. It means, that Gen-set
or mains is OK and proper circuit breaker is closed.

5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure

The displayed information is structured into "pages" and "screens". Use PAGE button to switch over the pages.
The page Measurement consists of screens which display measured values like voltages, current, oil
pressure etc., computed values like i.e. gen-set power, statistic data and the alarm list on the last screen.
The page Setpoints contains all setpoints organized to groups and also a special group for entering
password.
The page History log shows the history log in the order that the last record is displayed first.

Main Screen

Symbols
Padlock – active when LBI ACCESS LOCK is active
R – active when there is active remote connection to controller
Exclamation mark – active when there is any alarm in alarmlist

Optional
Value can be chosen via setpoints Main Screen Line 1 (page 226) and Main Screen Line 2 (page 226).
Posibilities are: RPM, PF, Run Hours, ATT, AIN1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 66

DRAFT!

Measurement Screens

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 67

DRAFT!

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Available only with plug-in module.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 72

DRAFT!

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Available only with plug-in module.

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

Note: Available only with ECU supported by TIER4F

Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 73

DRAFT!

Note: From all of these pages it is possible to switch seamlessly to the setpoint group page by pressing Page
button.

Note: There can be some additional screens and also some screens can be hidden. Screen’s visibility
depends on actual configuration (usage of extension or communication modules, ECU etc.).

Setpoint Screens

Note: From all measurement pages we can fluently go to the setpoint group page by pressing Page button.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
setpoint group.

Note: Use Enter button to enter selected setpoint group.

Note: Use Left and Right button to select required setpoint.

Note: Use Enter button to enter selected setpoint.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 74

DRAFT!

Note: Use Up and

Down button to set
required value of
selected setpoint.

Note: Use Enter button to confirm adjusted value of setpoint.

Note: Use Up button to move to alarmlist from main measurement screen.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 79

DRAFT!

Active alarms are displayed as white text on black background. It means the alarm is still active, i.e. the
appropriate alarm conditions are still present.
Inactive alarms are displayed as black text on white background. It means the alarm is no more active, i.e.
the appropriate alarm conditions are gone.
Not confirmed alarms are displayed with an asterisk. It means the alarm is still not acknowledged
(confirmed).
ECU alarms: SPN/FMI/OC/SC
SPN – Suspect parameter number
FMI – type of protection
OC – number of errors
SC – source of error

5.3.4 Login

Note: From all measurement pages we can fluently go to the setpoint group page by pressing Page button.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 80

DRAFT!

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select setpoint group
Password.

Note: Use Enter button to enter setpoint group Password.

UserID Edit

Note: Use Up and

Down Button to
change the digit.

Note: Use Left and Right button to move between digits.

Note: Use Enter button to confirm the UserID or Page button to cancel entering Login.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 81

DRAFT!

PIN Edit

Note: Use Up and

Down Button to
change the digit.

Note: Use Left and Right button to move between digits.

Note: Use Enter button to confirm the PIN and Loging or Page button to cancel entering the Login.

Note: In case that invalid UserID or PIN is entered, the controller shows Wrong Credentials screen. Use Enter
button to enter Login again or Page Button to go back to menu.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 82

DRAFT!

5.3.5 Information screen

+
Note: On Main measurement screen press Enter and Page button together. Enter button has to be pressed
first.

Note: Use Page button to move to the next page.

Note: Use Up button to move back to main measurement screen.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 83

DRAFT!

5.3.6 Language selection

+
Note: On Main measurement screen press Enter and Page button together. Enter button has to be pressed
first.

Note: Use Page button to move to the next page.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 84

DRAFT!

Note: Use Up and

down button to
select required
language.

Note: Use Enter button to confirm selected language.

5.3.7 Display contrast adjustment

+ +
Note: On any measurement screen press Enter and Note: On any measurement screen press Enter and
Down button together for lower contrast. Up button together for higher contrast.

Note: After setting a contrast, no another action is needed.

5.4 Remote Display

This chapter describes Remote display firmware IL4-RD, which is designed as a remote signaling and control
software for InteliLite 4 family controllers. It is the optional software which is possible to upload into controller
instead of standard controller’s firmware.

5.4.1 General description

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 85

DRAFT!

Master controller. Front panel buttons on both controllers work the same way. All remote display LEDs shows
the same state as corresponding LEDs on Master controller.
Note: Some settings are not shared between display and control unit (setpoint Backlight Timeout (page 222),
Controller language and Controller user mode).

5.4.2 IL4-RD Firmware installation

The IL4-RD Remote display firmware is installed in the same way as any other InteliLite 4 firmware using
InteliConfig PC tool. Reverting Remote display controller back to regular Gen-set controller is carried out the
same way.
Note: InteliConfig shows the most compatible and the most recent firmware as default option. Thus, it is
necessary use "More options" (…) button to pick IL4-RD firmware for uploading to controller. (See details on
picture below.)

Note: IL4-RD consists firmware only, there is no archive included.

5.4.6 Connection troubleshooting

There are few reasons why Remote display cannot connect to Master controller:
Not supported type of Master controller is connected.
Not supported firmware in Master controller.
Configuration table error in Master controller.
Wrong settings of setpoint COM x Mode in master controller.
Wrong settings of setpoint COM x Communication Speed in master controller.
Wrong connection, wiring, communication fail.

5.4.7 Function description

Remote display software works as "remote display and control" for the Master InteliLite 4 family controller. Gen-
set can be controlled using Remote display and Master controller simultaneously and independently. All
Remote display screens (Information screens, Measurement screens, Setpoint screens and History Log)
displays the same data as Master controller. Front panel buttons on both controllers work the same way. All
remote display LEDs shows the same state as corresponding LEDs on Master controller. User can switch
screens, enter or set password, adjust setpoints, change language, change Configuration Level, change display
contrast and view history records.
Note: It is recommended to use the same type and model of controller for Master and for Remote display. Only
in such case is assured the proper function of all buttons, LED diodes and display.

Example: When AMF controller HW type is used as a Master controller and MRS controller HW type is
used for Remote display there is no possibility to control MCB in MAN mode as there is no MCB button on
MRS controller. However, in general all this not recommended combinations works with similar to above
mentioned limitation considered.

Master device is always able to work without connected Remote display. Disconnecting of the serial line
between Master controller and Remote display has no effect to the Master controller.
When the serial line between Master controller and Remote display is disconnected, or communication cannot
be established, Remote display shows it’s own Init screen and message "Trying to connect" and all LEDs are
off.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 89

DRAFT!

Once remote display finds compatible master it shows message "Cfg processing" and downloads configuration
table from master controller. After the configuration from Master controller is downloaded Remote display is
reinitiated, jump to master controllers Main measurement screen and regular operation is started.
It is possible to switch to Remote display’s own Init screen to check IL4-RD FW version and serial number of
used controller and communication status by press and hold Page button for more than 3 seconds.

5.4.8 Firmware compatibility

Remote Display
IL4-RD FW is possible to upload into following controllers:
InteliLite AMF25
InteliLite AMF20
InteliLite AMF9
InteliLite AMF8
InteliLite MRS16

Note: All controllers from IL4 family can act as either Remote Display of master controller and will always be
compatible with each other.

5.5 Functions
5.5.1 Start-stop sequence 91
5.5.2 AMF sequence 93
5.5.3 Operating Modes 93
5.5.4 Engine start 95
5.5.5 Stabilization 100
5.5.6 Connecting to load 101
5.5.7 MRS operation 101
5.5.8 AMF operation 101
5.5.9 Dual Operation 102
5.5.10 Engine cool down and stop 105
5.5.11 History log 106
5.5.12 Breaker control 107
5.5.13 Exercise timers 110
5.5.14 Rental Timers 117
5.5.15 Service timers 118
5.5.16 Analog switches 118
5.5.17 Additional running engine indications 119
5.5.18 Voltage phase sequence detection 120
5.5.19 Gen-set operation states 120
5.5.20 Load shedding 123
5.5.21 Sensor curves 124
5.5.22 Protections 125
5.5.23 PLC 142

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 90

DRAFT!

5.5.24 Geo-fencing 149

5.5.25 Tier 4 Final 150
5.5.26 Alternate configuration 152
5.5.27 USB host 153
5.5.28 E-Stop 157
5.5.29 ECU Frequency selection 158
5.5.30 User Buttons 158
5.5.31 User management and data access control 160
5.5.32 User setpoints 166
5.5.33 Cybernetic security 167

6 back to Controller setup

5.5.1 Start-stop sequence

State Condition of the transition Action Next state
Ready Start request PRESTART (PAGE 531) on Prestart Prestart
Time (page 232) counter started
RPM > 2 or Oil pressure > Stop (Stop
Starting Oil Pressure (page fail)
233) or Generator voltage > 10V
or D+ voltage is higher than D+
Threshold (page 248)
OFF Mode selected or Shutdown Not Ready
alarm active
Not Ready RPM < 2, Oil pressure not Ready
detected, Generator voltage < 10
V, D+ not Active no shutdown
alarm active, other than OFF
Mode selected
Prestart Prestart time elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 509) on, Cranking
STARTER 1 (PAGE 536) or STARTER 2
(PAGE 536) on, Maximum Cranking
Time (page 231) counter started
Cranking RPM > Starting RPM STARTER 1 (PAGE 536) or STARTER 2 Starting
(PAGE 536) off, PRESTART (PAGE 531)
off
D+ input activated or oil pressure STARTER 1 (PAGE 536) or STARTER 2 Cranking
detected or Generator voltage > (PAGE 536) off, PRESTART (PAGE 531)
25% Nominal voltage off
Maximum Cranking Time STARTER 1 (PAGE 536) or STARTER 2 Crank
(page 231), 1st attempt (PAGE 536) off, FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE pause
509) off, STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 537)
on, Cranking Fail Pause (page 231)
timer started

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 91

DRAFT!

Maximum Cranking Time STARTER 1 (PAGE 536) or STARTER 2 Shutdown

(page 231) elapsed, last attempt (PAGE 536) off, PRESTART (PAGE 531) (Start fail)
off
Crank pause Cranking Fail Pause (page STARTER 1 (PAGE 536) or STARTER 2 Cranking
231) elapsed (PAGE 536) on, FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
509) on, STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 537)
off, Maximum Cranking Time (page
231) counter started
Starting Idle Time (page 239) elapsed Minimal Stabilization Time (page Running
241) and Maximal Stabilization Time
(page 242) counter started
any shutdown condition FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 509) off, STOP Shutdown
SOLENOID (PAGE 537) on
all cranking attempts elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 509) off, STOP Shutdown
SOLENOID (PAGE 537) on (Start fail)
Running Stop request READY TO LOAD (PAGE 534) Cooling
off,Cooling Time (page 244) counter
started
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown READY TO LOAD (PAGE 534) off, FUEL Shutdown
condition SOLENOID (PAGE 509) off
GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 511) Loaded
closed
Loaded GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 511) Running
opened
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 509) off, STOP Shutdown
condition SOLENOID (PAGE 537) on, READY TO
LOAD (PAGE 534) off,
Cooling Cooling Time (page 244) FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 509) off, STOP Stop
elapsed SOLENOID (PAGE 537) on
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 509) off, STOP Shutdown
condition SOLENOID (PAGE 537) on
Start request READY TO LOAD (PAGE 534) on Running
Stop RPM = 0, Oil pressure not Ready
detected, Generator voltage
<10 V, D+ not active
If at least one of engine running Stop (Stop
indication is detected when Stop fail)
Time (page 244) elapsed.

Note: If all generator parameters are OK and Minimal Stabilization Time (page 241) elapsed, indicates that
GCB is possible to close. In AUTO Mode GCB is closed in this moment automatically.

Note: The start-up sequence can be interrupted in any time by stop request.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 92

DRAFT!

5.5.2 AMF sequence

State Condition of the transition Action Next state
Mains Mains failed or MCB FEEDBACK MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 523)off, Mains
operation (PAGE 484) dropout, MCB Emergency Start Delay (page 279) timer failure
Opens On (page 290) = Mains started
Fail
Mains failed or MCB FEEDBACK Emergency Start Delay (page 279) timer Mains
(PAGE 484) dropout, MCB started failure
Opens On (page 290) = Gen
Run
Mains Mains voltage and frequency OK, After elapsing MCB Close Delay (page Mains
failure MCB Opens On (page 290) = 280) MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 523) on operation
Mains Fail
Mains voltage and frequency OK, None Mains
MCB Opens On (page 290) = operation
Gen Run
Emergency Start Delay (page Engine start sequence performed, then Island
279) elapsed, MCB Opens On GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 511) on operation
(page 290) = Mains Fail
Emergency Start Delay (page Engine start sequence performed, then Island
279) elapsed, MCB Opens On MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 523) off, time operation
(page 290) = Gen Run delay Transfer Delay (page 280)
performed and GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE
511) on
Island Mains voltage and frequency OK Mains Return Delay (page 279) timer Mains return
operation started
Mains return Mains failed Island
operation
Mains Return Delay (page 279) GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 511) off, then Mains
elapsed after Transfer Delay (page 280) MCB operation
CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 523) on and then
engine stop sequence performed

Note: Mains failed means mains over/under -voltage, over/under -frequency, voltage asymmetry (preset delay
must elapse)

Note: If during start-up sequence mains returns, then MCB is reclosed with delay MCB Close Delay (page
280)(if opened, depending on MCB Opens On (page 290) setpoint) and start-up sequence is interrupted.

Note: If mains fails during stop procedure (cooling) again, stop sequence is interrupted, MCB opened and GCB
re-closed with Transfer Delay (page 280).

5.5.3 Operating Modes

Selecting the operating mode is done through Left and Right buttons on the front panel or by changing the
Controller Mode (page 219) setpoint (from the front panel or remotely).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 93

DRAFT!

Note: If this setpoint is configured as password-protected, the correct password must be entered prior to
attempting to change the mode.

Note: The mode cannot be changed if Access Lock input is active.

The following binary inputs can be used to force one respective operating mode independent of the mode
setpoint selection:
Remote OFF (page 488)
Remote TEST (page 490)
Remote MAN (page 488)
Remote AUTO (page 487)
If the respective input is active the controller will change the mode to the respective position according to the
active input. If multiple inputs are active, the mode will be changed according to priorities of the inputs. The
priorities match the order in the list above. If all inputs are deactivated, the mode will return to the original
position given by the setpoint.

OFF
No start of the gen-set is possible .Controller stays in Not ready status and cannot be started any way. The
MCB is closed permanently (MCB Opens On (page 290) = GENRUN) or is open or closed according to
whether the mains is present or not (MCB Opens On (page 290) = MAINSFAIL). No AMF function will be
performed. The buttons MCB , GCB , Start and Stop including the appropriate binary inputs for
external buttons are not active.
IMPORTANT: When engine is running, it is not possible to switch Gen-set to OFF mode.

MAN
The engine can be started and stopped manually using the Start and Stop buttons (or external buttons
wired to the appropriate binary inputs) in MAN mode. When the engine is running, GCB can be closed. Also
MCB can be closed and opened manually using the MCB button, regardless of whether the mains are present or
not. No auto start is performed.
Note: The controller provides interlock between GCB and MCB, it means it is never possible to close both CB
together.

AUTO
The controller does not respond to buttons Start , Stop , MCB ON/OFF and GCB ON/OFF . Engine
start/stop request is evaluated form Mains failure/return.
Note: When the AMF function will start the engine than the engine will be running at least for the time which is
defined in Mains Return Delay (page 279) setpoint, even if the mains would return in the meantime.

TEST
The gen-set will be started when the controller is put to TEST mode and will remain running unloaded. If a mains
failure occurs, the MCB will be opened and after Transfer Delay (page 280) the GCB will be closed and the
Gen-set will supply the load. After the mains have recovered, the delay Mains Return Delay (page 279)l will
count down and if it elapses and the mains is still ok, the controller will transfer the load back to the mains after
Transfer Delay (page 280) and the Gen-set will remain running unloaded again until the mode is changed.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 94

DRAFT!

Remote test on load

When binary input is active, the controller automatically transfers load from the mains to the Gen-set. See LBI
REM TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 487).

OFF
No start of the gen-set is possible. Controller stays in Not ready status and cannot be started any way. The
buttons GCB , Start and Stop including the appropriate binary inputs for external buttons are not
active.
IMPORTANT: When engine is running, it is not possible to switch Gen-set to OFF mode.

Image 5.13 Flowchart of start of gas engine

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 99

DRAFT!

Dual Starter
Dual Starter function is enabled if LBO STARTER 2 (PAGE 536) is configured and Setpoint Dual Starter
Sequence (page 230) is set to any of sequence options: 1-2 or 11-22.
Dual Starter Sequence options:
Disabled (Default)
1-2 (Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 536) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 536) according
to the order of option pattern 1-2.
11-22 (Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 536) then STARTER 1 (PAGE 536) then
STARTER 2 (PAGE 536) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 536) according to the order of option pattern 11-22.
The total number of attempts is defined by the Setpoint Cranking Attempts (page 231).
Example:
Cranking Attempts=5, Dual Starter Sequence =1-2
Gen-set will activate Starter 1 (if failed) then Starter 2 (if failed) then Starter 1 (if failed) then Starter
2 (if failed) then Starter 1
Cranking Attempts=5, Dual Starter Sequence =11-22
Gen-set will activate Starter 1 (if failed) then Starter 1 (if failed) then Starter 2 (if failed) then Starter
2 (if failed) then Starter 1

The order of sequence is affected by the actual status of LBI STARTER PRIORITY (PAGE 491) (0-Starter 1, 1-
Starter 2).
LBIs STARTER 1 DISABLED (PAGE 490), STARTER 2 DISABLED (PAGE 491). If the LBI Starter 1,2 Disabled state
is 1 the starter1 ,2 will be skipped in the sequence. Skipped starter is not counted as cranking attempt.
In case both starters are disabled, controller is in the state not ready.
Value Num Starts (page 425) stores the total successful starts of both starters.

5.5.5 Stabilization
When the Engine start (page 95) sequence is finished, the Gen-set goes into the stabilization phase. There are
two timers (setpoints) in this phase:
Minimal Stabilization Time (page 241) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished.
Generator voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) and the GCB
cannot be closed even if the generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
Maximal Stabilization Time (page 242) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished.
Generator voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) but, opposite to
the previous timer, the GCB can be closed if generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
In situations where the GCB is closed automatically (AUTO, TEST modes), the closing of GCB will occur in the
first moment when the generator voltage and frequency will get into limits and the Minimal Stabilization Time
(page 241) has already elapsed.
In the event that the generator voltage or frequency are not within limits within the Maximal Stabilization Time
(page 242) period, the appropriate protection(s) will be activated and the Gen-set will be cooled down and
stopped.
Note: The limits for the generator voltage and frequency are given by setpoints in the Group: Generator
settings (page 263)Group: Generator settings (page 263)Group: Generator settings (page 263).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 100

DRAFT!

Note: The value of the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 241) setpoint has to be lower than the value of
Maximal Stabilization Time (page 242) setpoint.

5.5.6 Connecting to load

When the Stabilization (page 100) phase is finished, the Gen-set can be connected to the load.
The command for connecting the Gen-set to the load is issued either automatically (AUTO, TEST modes) or
manually by pressing the GCB button. The following conditions must be valid:
The Gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 241) timer has elapsed.
The Gen-set voltage and frequency are within limits.

5.5.7 MRS operation

The "MRS function" represents manual or remote start of gen-set. It is ideal for prime power applications.

The MRS procedure

When the start command is detected, the following steps are performed:
The Gen-set is started.
GCB is closed and the gen-set begins to supply the load (in AUTO mode, otherwise GCB button has to be
pressed)
When the stop command is detected, the following steps are performed:
GCB is opened and the gen-set stops supply the load.
After GCB is opened, the gen-set cools down and a stop.

5.5.8 AMF operation

The "AMF function" represents the automatic start in the event that the mains have failed and stop after the
mains have been restored. The automatic start can be enabled or disabled by binary inputs AMF START BLOCK
(PAGE 472) or MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 482).
Note: The AMF function works only in AUTO mode.

Mains failure detection

The mains are considered as faulty when one or more of the following conditions are valid:
The mains voltage is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains Undervoltage (page 283) and Mains
Overvoltage (page 282) for a time period longer than Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay (page 286).
The mains voltage unbalance is out of limit given by setpoint Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 286) for a
time period longer than Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay (page 286).
The mains frequency is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains Underfrequency (page 287) and
Mains Overfrequency (page 286) for a time period longer than Mains < > Frequency Delay (page 1).
The MCB close command was not successful and the alarm Wrn MCB Fail (page 592) was not reset.
Phase rotation is incorrect.

Healthy mains detection

The mains are considered to be healthy when all of following conditions are valid:

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 101

DRAFT!

The mains voltage is within the limits given by the setpoints Mains Undervoltage (page 283) and Mains
Overvoltage (page 282).
The mains voltage unbalance is within the limits given by the setpoint Mains Voltage Unbalance (page
286).
The mains frequency is within the limits given by the setpoints Mains Underfrequency (page 287) and
Mains Overfrequency (page 286).
The alarm Wrn MCB Fail (page 592) is not active (if MCB feedback is active). This condition is not required
if MCB is open (MCB feedback is inactive).
Phase rotation is correct.

The AMF procedure

When the mains failure is detected, the following steps are performed:
If the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 290) is set to Mains Fail, the MCB is opened
The timer for automatic start of the Gen-set Emergency Start Delay (page 279) begins to count down.
After the timer has elapsed, the Gen-set is started.

Note: The automatic start of the Gen-set due to AMF function can be disabled by the binary inputs AMF START
BLOCK (PAGE 472) or MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 482).

If the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 290) is set to Gen Run, the MCB is opened once the generator
voltage is within limits (after Minimal Stabilization Time (page 241) elapses).
Note: If the mains are restored to health and the Gen-set is still not connected to the load, the controller
interrupts the startup process and closes back the MCB.

After Transfer Delay (page 280) elapses, the GCB is closed and the Gen-set begins to supply the load.
After the mains restored to normal, the timer Mains Return Delay (page 279) begins to count down.
Maximum time between closing of MCB and opening GCB is given by the setpoint Transfer Delay (page
280). After GCB is opened, the Gen-set cools down and a stop.
IMPORTANT: Controller has this behavior only in AUTO mode!

5.5.9 Dual Operation

Dual operation – AMF
Dual operation - AMF consists 2 gen-sets and 1 mains. Principle of dual operation is in switching the gen-sets in
supplying of load when there is a mains fail or LBI REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 489) is activated on Master
controller. Each controller measures mains and its gen-set. Interlock between all breakers (GCB1, GCB2 and
MCB) is required. If there is fail of one gen-set, second gen-set will take the load.
MCB control from both controllers is not required. Slave controller in Dual Operation doesn’t control MCB (MCB
Close/Open is in open position). However it is recommended to be prepare to control MCB also from slave
controller – in case of fail of Dual Operation, both controllers are switch to normal AMF operation.
IMPORTANT: Dual operation works only in AUTO mode.

IMPORTANT: Dual operation is in fail also during process of adjustment of setpoints. In this
moment slave still tries to control MCB.

IMPORTANT: Setpoint MCB Opens On (page 290) has to be set-up to Mains Fail option.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 102

DRAFT!

IMPORTANT: LBI MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 482) can cause fail of dual operation system. In case of
different states of mains on master and slave controllers, alarm AHI Dual Operation Different Mains
(page 589) is activated and gen-sets are switched to normal operation.

Note: LBI AMF START BLOCK (PAGE 472) is evaluated on both controllers. When this LBI is activated, gen-set
can’t start in dual operation. Second gen-set (without active AMF START BLOCK (PAGE 472)) will start. Gen-
sets are not swapping the load until this LBI is active. Behaviour is the same like with alarm of 2nd level.

Note: MCB Fail protection is not used in Slave controller during Dual Operation. MCB is controlled only via
Master. Slave controller has MCB Close/Open in open position all the time during Dual Operation.

Start/stop events
Event Dual AMF
Mains Fail Evaluated by Master only
LBI REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 489) Evaluated by Master only

Dual operation – MRS

Dual operation MRS consists 2 gen-sets. Principle of dual operation is in switching the gen-sets in supplying of
load when REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 489) is activated on Master controller (on slave controller this LBI has
no function in Dual Operation). Each controller measures its gen-set. Interlock between all breakers (GCB1 and
GCB2) is required. If there is fail of one gen-set, second gen-set will take the load.
IMPORTANT: Dual operation works only in AUTO mode.

IMPORTANT: Dual operation is in fail also during process of adjustment of setpoints.

IMPORTANT: It is not possible to use Auto Run option in Exercise timers with dual operation.

Start/stop events
Event Dual MRS
LBI REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 489) Evaluated by Master only

Communication
Communication is establish on RS232 or RS485 communication line. Plug-in module CM-RS232-485 is
required. Communication line is selected via setpoints COM1 Mode (page 377) or COM2 Mode (page 378) or
RS485 Mode (page 228). There are options DualMaster and DualSlave. These options adjust, which
communication line is selected and which role controller has in Dual Operation.
IMPORTANT: For correct communication it is necessary to have one Master and one Slave
controller on the same communication line.

IMPORTANT: There are no shared setpoints. It is necessary to have the same settings of AMF
setpoints and engine timers in both controllers.

In case of communication fail between controllers, alarm AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 588) is activated.
This alarm is activated on both controllers. Both controllers are switched to normal operation.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 103

DRAFT!

Adjustment of COM Modes

COM Mode in COM Mode in
Behavior
controller 1 controller 2
Master Slave OK - normal dual operation function
Slave Master OK - normal dual operation function
There will be communication fail (it is necessary to have master and
slave to establish communication line) - there will be active alarm AHI
Master Master
Dual Operation Fail (page 588). This alarm will be active on both
controllers. Both controllers will be switched to normal operation.
There will be communication fail (it is necessary to have master and
slave to establish communication line) - there will be active alarm AHI
Slave Slave
Dual Operation Fail (page 588). This alarm will be active on both
controllers. Both controllers will be switched to normal operation.
There will be communication fail (it is necessary to have master and
slave to establish communication line) - there will be active alarm AHI
Disabled Master/Slave Dual Operation Fail (page 588). This alarm will be active on
master/slave controller. Both controllers will be switched to normal
operation.
There will be communication fail (it is necessary to have master and
slave to establish communication line) - there will be active alarm AHI
Master/Slave Disabled Dual Operation Fail (page 588). This alarm will be active on
master/slave controller. Both controllers will be switched to normal
operation.
Disabled Disabled Both controllers are in normal operation.

Switching of Gen-sets
Switching of Gen-sets is based on their Running Hours (page 426). The time how long the Gen-set is running
is adjusted via setpoint Running Hours Max Difference (page 290). When difference of Running Hours
(page 426) between Gen-sets is bigger then value adjusted in this setpoint, load is transferred from first Gen-set
to second Gen-set. First Gen-set is supplying the load until second Gen-set is in running state. Then the GCB of
first Gen-set is opened. From this moment timer Transfer Delay (page 280) counts down. When it counts
down, GCB of second Gen-set can be closed.
Note: Value of Running Hours (page 426) can be modified by setpoint Running Hours Base (page 291).
This setpoint can add or remove additional running hours to value from statistics. This modified value of running
hours is used in dual operation function.

Note: In case that both Gen-sets have the same running hours, Master controller has higher priority.

Note: Switching of Gen-sets can be inhibit by setpoint Swap Gen-sets (page 291) or by binary input DUAL
SWAP GEN-SETS (PAGE 477).

Note: Priority of Gen-set can be changed by binary input DUAL TOP PRIORITY (PAGE 477). In this case running
hours values are not used to decide, which Gen-set should start.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 104

DRAFT!

Dual operation adjustment

Prepare two InteliLite AMF 25 or two InteliLite MRS 16 controllers with CM-RS232-485 modules
Copy the identical configurations to both of them
Use wiring with mechanical/electrical interlock between all breakers (mechanical interlock is preferred)
Switch both controllers to OFF mode to prevent automatic or remote start
Adjust setpoints COM1 Mode (page 377) or COM2 Mode (page 378) (depends on prefered communication
line) to DualMaster on first controller and Dual Slave on second controller
Interconnect communication terminals on CM-RS232-485 modules
Adjust setpoint MCB Opens On (page 290) to Mains Fail option
Adjust setpoint Running Hours Max Difference (page 290) on Master controller
Adjust setpoints Running Hours Base (page 291) on both controllers if running hours change is needed for
dual operation
Adjust additional function of dual operation - Master Error Protection (page 292), Slave Error Protection
(page 292) and Swap Gen-sets (page 291) setpoints
Change the mode of both controllers to AUTO
System is now ready for dual operation function

Note: Breakers feedbacks are recommended, but not required.

Alarms related to dual operation:

AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 588)
WRN Dual Operation Master Fail (page 589)
AHI Dual Operation Slave Fail (page 589)
AHI Dual Operation Different Mains (page 589)
ALI Dual Operation Different FW Version (page 588)

An output for control of a contactor. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
Close/Open controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise
an alarm is issued.
An output giving a 5 second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed. The output is
ON coil
intended for control of close coils of circuit breakers.
An output giving a pulse in the moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until
OFF coil the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5 seconds. The output is intended for control of
open coils of circuit breakers.
The GCB UV coil output is active the whole time the Gen-set is running (not in idle or
cooling). The MCB UV coil output is active when the controller is switched on. The output is
UV coil
deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the breaker has to be switched off. The
output is intended for control of undervoltage coils of circuit breakers.

Image 5.14 Breaker control outputs

MCB special requirements

If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it is recommended that the wiring be provided in such a way that
the contactor will be normally closed and will open if the logical binary output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 523)
is activated. This behavior is called "negative logic" and can be adjusted by the setpoint MCB Logic (page
288). The negative logic will prevent accidental opening of the MCB when the controller is switched off.
If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it will open itself immediately after the mains have failed,
because it will lose power for the coil. That is why the following adjustment is necessary to prevent triggering
the Wrn MCB Fail (page 592) alarm: MCB Opens On (page 290) = Mains Fail, Mains <> Voltage Delay
(page 283) ≤1.
If a 230 V motor driven circuit breaker is used on the MCB position and an undervoltage coil is not fitted, it is
not possible to open the breaker after the mains have failed, because there is no power for the motor drive

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 108

DRAFT!

until the Gen-set is started and providing voltage. Adjusting the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 290) = Gen
Run will prevent triggering the Wrn MCB Fail (page 592) alarm.

Breaker fail detection

Breaker fail detection is based on binary output breaker close/open comparing with binary input breaker
feedback.
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to configure breaker feedback to use this function.

IMPORTANT: Also it is possible to use breakers without feedbacks. In this case there is no check
of breaker real state.

There are three different time delays for breaker fail detection – see following diagrams.
When binary output breaker close/open is in steady state and breaker feedback is changed the breaker fail is
detected immediately (no delay).

Image 5.15 Breaker fail – breaker close/open in steady position – open

Image 5.21 Weekly mode – InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Weekly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the x-th week of repetition
(Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 338) and days when timer should be active (Timer 1 Day (page 336).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 2nd week on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 332)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 334) setpoint select
Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 333), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 334)
and Timer 1 Duration (page 334). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 335) select Weekly and adjust Timer
1 Day (page 336) (days when timer should be active) and Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 338) (x-th week of
repetition).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

Monthly mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.
Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 332).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 114

DRAFT!

There are two types of monthly repetition. First of them is based on repeating one day in month.

Image 5.22 Monthly mode – InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the type of monthly
repetition and the x-th day of repetition (Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 336)). Than select the x-th month
of repetition.
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 2nd day in 2nd month at 12:00 for 1 hour.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 115

DRAFT!

Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM (page 232) or
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 233) or
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 485) is in logical 0 or
Generator voltage > 25 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 214)

Still engine conditions

Engine speed (RPM) < Starting RPM (page 232) or
Oil pressure < Starting Oil Pressure (page 233) or
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 485) is in logical 1 or
Generator voltage < 50 V (any phase)

Note: When the engine was running before and all above conditions are fulfilled, additional 2 s delay is
necessary to confirm "still engine".

When any engine running conditions are appeared on still engine than the Wrn Stop Fail (page 590) is
activated with following delay:
For generator voltage from 10 V to < 50 % of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
For generator voltage > 50 % of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 200 ms
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 233), Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 485) is in logical 0, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
For detected RPM, there is no delay.

Stop engine conditions

If no engine running conditions are validated than the controller will wait extra 2 s before leaving the Machine
state Stop and than it will release the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 537) output.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 121

DRAFT!

Image 5.26 Engine stops in Stop Time (page 244)

When the total time of stopping will exceed setpoint Stop Time (page 244) than the Wrn Stop Fail (page 590)
and binary outputs are activated. The controller will continuously try to stop the engine.

Image 5.27 Engine stops after first Stop Time (page 244)

Electric state machine

Mains is present and all its values are within limits.

MainsOper
Example: MCB is closed, GCB is opened
MainsFlt Mains fails
Island operation
IslOper
Example: MCB is opened, GCB is closed
MainsRet Mains recover
BrksOff GCB, MCB opened

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 122

DRAFT!

5.5.20 Load shedding

The Load shedding is controlled disconnection of less important load groups (circuits) when the object
consumption is too high.

Load shedding stages

The Load Shedding function consists of 8 stages which are numbered 1-8. Stages are disconnected in
ascending order up to the last configured stage. Reconnecting of stages is in descending order and starts with
higher configured stage. Stage is considered as configured when respective Load Shedding Output is
configured. Highest activated load shedding stage is stored in value Load Shedding Status (page 429).

Load shedding outputs

Stage LBO
Stage 1 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1 (PAGE 521)
Stage 2 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 2 (PAGE 521)
Stage 3 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 3 (PAGE 522)
Stage 4 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 4 (PAGE 522)
Stage 5 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 5 (PAGE 522)

How the Load shedding controls the Load shedding outputs

The load shedding function is active in all controller modes except OFF.
Load shedding has three steps and each step is linked with its own binary output, LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1
(PAGE 521), LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 2 (PAGE 521), LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 3 (PAGE 522), LOAD SHEDDING
STAGE 4 (PAGE 522) and LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 5 (PAGE 522).
The Load shedding outputs can be activated one by one in the direction 1, 2, 3. The condition for activation are
defined by setpoints Load Shedding Level (page 293) and Load Shedding Delay (page 294).
The Load shedding outputs are deactivated one by one according to the conditions given by the setpoints Load
Reconnection Level (page 294), Load Reconnection Delay (page 294), AUTO LOAD RECONNECTION (PAGE
295).
For manual reconnection of the load is desired the Auto Load Reconnection (page 295) setpoint needs to be
disabled and the MANUAL LOAD RECONNECTION (PAGE 483) digital input needs to be configured.

Image 5.28 Load shedding

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 123

DRAFT!

Image 5.29 Load reconnection

Image 5.30 Load manual reconnection

5.5.21 Sensor curves

Background of the sensor calibration
To correct measuring error of each analog input (pressure, temperature, level, etc.) calibrating constants should
be set. Calibration is made by adding the value of setpoint CU AIN1 Calibration (page 381), or CU AIN2
Calibration (page 382), or CU AIN3 Calibration (page 382), or CU AIN4 Calibration (page 383) directly to
the calculated value at analog input.
Note: The calibration must be done at the operational point of the analog input (e.g. 80 °C, 4.0 Bar etc..)

Default sensor curves

There are 16 default resistive curves available. The following table provides information on minimum/maximum
values of respective sensors. Actual values especially of temperature curves may differ. Meaning is to prolong
curve to the lower temperature values, so the cold engine will not raise alarm fail sensor.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 124

DRAFT!

Curve Min [Ω] Max [Ω] Units

VDO 10 Bar 0-2400ohm 0 2400 Bar
VDO40-120°C0-2400ohm 0 2400 °C
VDOLevel%0-2400ohm 0 2400 %
General line 1 0 1000 Ω
General line 2 0 1000 Ω
General line 3 0 1000 Ω
General line 4 0 1000 Ω
General line 5 0 1000 Ω
General line 6 0 1000 Ω
General line 7 0 1000 Ω
General line 8 0 1000 Ω
General line 9 0 1000 Ω
General line 10 0 1000 Ω
General line 11 0 1000 Ω
General line 12 0 1000 Ω
General line 13 0 1000 Ω

Note: Curves can be modified via InteliConfig. In InteliConfig are also prepared some standard curves.

IMPORTANT: For right behavior of function, curve for this analog input has to be in percentage and
setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 252) has to be adjusted correctly.

5.5.22 Protections
InteliLite 4 allows users to configure their own protections to any analog or binary input (see Logical binary
inputs alphabetically on page 471). More than one protection can be configured on analog input, number of
configured protections is not limited. Only one protection of 1st level and/or one protection of 2nd level can be
configured on logical binary output.

Fixed Protections
Some selected fixed protections has an option to DISABLE the protection.
The setting is done by using the setpoint which is associated to the fixed protection. Each setpoint offers these
options.

Protection types

Fault Action:
Alarm LBO Horn activation LBO Alarm activation Action: SD Override
Name Level Abbreviation History Reset Gen-set Common LBO
List (inc. Flashing) (inc. Flashing) CB open blocking
needed stop
AL COMMON
Warning 1 Wrn - - -
WRN ( PAGE 501)

Alarm Only 1 Al - - -

History Record Only 1 Hst - - - - - - -

Alarm List Indication 1 ALI - - - - - - - -

Alarm List + History

1 AHI - - - - - - -
Record Indication
AL COMMON SD
Shutdown 2 Sd
( PAGE 500)
Breaker Open & Cool AL COMMON
BOC
Down BOC ( PAGE 499)

Protection blocking
Engine, Generator and the other fixed protections are blocked during starting phases or Ready and Stop states. They become unblocked once Maximal Stabilization
Time (page 242) is elapsed or GCB is closed depends what happens first.
Exceptions are:
Overspeed protection which has two limits defined via setpoints Overspeed Sd (page 249) and Starting Overspeed Sd (page 249). Starting Oversppeed limit is
considered in the starting phase till Starting Overspeed Time elapses. This time starts to count once the RPM exceeds the value of Starting RPM (page 232).
E-Stop and Emergency stop
The other way how fixed protections can be blocked is by active LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 490).
Note: LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 490) (Shutdown Override) does not block evaluation of fixed protection conditions and their visualization. They are recorded into alarm list
or history. It only blocks their actions. Shutdown Override blocks all level 2 (Sd, BOC) fixed protection. It does not block level 1 (Wrn, AHI, Hist) or protection of type Sd
Override.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 129

User Protections
Source upon which the protection is configured can be selected. It can be any analog value or binary state.

Source
Analog values Binary states
Binary inputs
Analog inputs
Controller, Modules, ECU, Shared I/O
Controller, Modules
Modbus server, Modbus Master
Values
Binary outputs
ECU, MER, Application, PLC, Shared I/O
PLC
Modbus server, Modbus Master
Protection states
Statistics
LBOs

Protection activation
Type Name of activation Description
Over Limit Protection is activated if value is over limit.
Over Limit + Fls Protection is activated if value is over limit or in a fault state.
Analog Under Limit Protection is activated if value is under limit.
Under Limit + Fls Protection is activated if value is under limit or in a fault state.
Fls only Protection is activated if value is in a fault state.
True Protection is activated if value is Logical 1.
TrueOrFls Protection is activated if value is Logical 1 or in a fault state.
Binary
False Protection is activated if value is Logical 0.
FalseOrFls Protection is activated if value is Logical 0 or in a fault state.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 130

Protection types

Fault LBO Horn LBO Alarm Action: SD

Alarm Action:
Name Level Abbreviation History Reset activation (inc. activation (inc. Gen-set Override Common LBO
List CB open
needed Flashing) Flashing) stop blocking
AL COMMON WRN
Warning 1 Wrn - - -
( PAGE 501)

History Record Only 1 Hst - - - - - - -

Alarm List + History

1 AHI - - - - - - -
Record Indication
AL COMMON SD
Shutdown 2 Sd
( PAGE 500)
Breaker Open & Cool AL COMMON BOC
BOC
Down ( PAGE 499)
AL COMMON SD
Shutdown Override 2 Sd -
OVERRIDE ( PAGE 500)

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 131

DRAFT!

Configuration of protections in InteliConfig

Control tab → Controller configuration → Protections tab → Analog / Binary protections

Select the desired protections to be configured (Analog protections / Binary protections).

Add protection by clicking on the icon .

Delete selected protection by clicking on the icon .

Edit selected protection by clicking on the icon .

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 132

DRAFT!

Adding analog protection

Selecting the input source see User Protections on page 130.

Selecting the protection type see Protection types on page 129.

Selecting the protection activation see Protection activation on page 130.

Selecting the block type see Protection blocking on page 134.

Selecting if the occurrence of a protection is recorded every time or only once after a Fault Reset.

Selecting the input for limit.

Setpoints must have the correct resolution and dimension as protection source value.
Existing setpoint
New user setpoint
Existing user setpoint
Prefix is added to the name based on protection type / level
Selecting the input for delay.
Setpoints must have the correct resolution 0.1 and dimension [s]
Existing setpoint
New user setpoint
Existing user setpoint
Prefix is added to the name based on protection type / level.

Text input for Alarm / History message.

If User protection state is checked the protection is then shown in setpoints under the
Group: User Setpoints (page 295).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 133

DRAFT!

Adding binary protection

Selecting the input source see User Protections on page 130.

Selecting the protection type see Protection types on page 129.

Selecting the protection activation see Protection activation on page 130.

Selecting the block type see Protection blocking on page 134.

Selecting if the occurrence of a protection is recorded every time or only once after a Fault Reset.

Selecting the input for delay.

Setpoints must have the correct resolution 0.1 and dimension [s]
Existing setpoint
New user setpoint
Existing user setpoint

Text input for Alarm / History message

If User protection state is checked the protection is then shown in setpoints under the
Group: User Setpoints (page 295).

Protection blocking
It is possible to configure one Protection Blocking to any User Protections (page 130). This function is used to
block certain protections when their function is unwanted or meaningless. Each user protection has an option to
set the blocking condition.
The blocking conditions can be also applied on the Fixed Protections (page 1).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 134

DRAFT!

Protection blocking
Block
Description
Type
All the
The protection is not blocked. It can be blocked only by LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 490).
time
Run Only
The protection is blocked depending on engine state and time defined by setpoint Run Only Block
Block
Delay (page 1). It can also be blocked by LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 490).
Delay
Force The protection is blocked by LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 486) or by LBI SD OVERRIDE
Block (PAGE 490).
The protection is blocked depending on engine state. It is unblocked once Maximal Stabilization
Electrical
Time (page 242) is elapsed or GCB is closed. It can also be blocked by LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE
Protection
490).

General protections
LBI FORCE PROTECTION DISABLE (PAGE 479) is paired with an option of protection condition "Force Block" and
can be used for Blocking / Disabling of protections, however on user defined protections the option causes
protection Blocking instead of Disabling.

Run only protection

Setpoint Run Only Block Delay (page 243) is paired with an option of protection condition "Run Only Block
Delay".

History record

Always
Once
SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 490)

Evaluation period 0.1 s.

Image 5.31

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 135

DRAFT!

Protection states
Protection states is a new feature introduced in InteliLite 4, which helps with better management of alarms. Until
now, you could only use LBO ALARM (PAGE 502) which did not specify what is going on. Protection states work
in similar way, like any other LBO. The difference is, that protection state gets active only when there is specific
alarm present in the alarm list. Thanks to this, you can create PLC logic, which will react to specific alarms only.

Fixed protection states

Important Fixed Protections (page 125) have a protection state. The protection state is (usually) named
exactly as the alarm. Fixed protection states are in a group of 32.
Protection states groups:
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563)
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564)
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565)
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566)
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 5 (PAGE 567)

User protections states

During the Configuration of protections in InteliConfig (page 132), you can decide whether you want to add
user protection state for the protection. The name is exactly same as the alarm's message.
When you're adding user protection state, it will try to fill in gaps (if there are any present) in an actual List of
Fixed Protection States (page 562), if there is no gap, it will be automatically added to the end. User
protection states are in a group of 32 with maximally 10 groups i.e. 320 user protection states are available.
Note: Group of User protection states is showed only when there is at least 1 protection state in it.

Alarm management
The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. Level 1 – yellow alarm – is a pre-critical alarm that is only
informative and does not take any action regarding Gen-set control. Level 2 – red alarm – represents a critical
situation, where an action must be taken to prevent damage of the Gen-set or technology.
One alarm of any type can be assigned to each binary input.
Two alarms (one yellow and one red type) can be assigned to each analog input.
There are also Built-in alarms (page 140) with fixed alarm types.
Each alarm is written to the Alarmlist (page 139).
Each alarm causes a record to be written into the history log.
Each alarm activates the Alarm and Horn output.
Each alarm can cause sending of a SMS message or an email.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 136

DRAFT!

Image 5.32 Analog input alarm evaluation principle

Alarm handling
There are three different alarm categories regarding the period when the alarms are evaluated. The category is
selectable for alarms assigned to binary/analog inputs and fixed for built-in alarms. The categories are the
following:
The alarm is evaluated all the time when the controller is switched on.
The alarm is evaluated only when the engine is running. This type should be used for e.g. oil pressure. These
alarms begin to be evaluated after the engine has been started with the delay given by the setpoint
Protection Hold Off (page 1).
The alarm is evaluated only when the generator is excited. These alarms begin to be evaluated after the
engine has been started and Maximal Stabilization Time (page 242) has elapsed or the GCB has been
closed. They remain evaluated until cooling has finished. Only Generator under/overvoltage, Generator
voltage unbalance and Generator under/overfrequency belong to this category. This category is not
configurable to binary and analog input alarms.
If an alarm is being evaluated and the appropriate alarm condition is fulfilled, the delay of evaluation will start to
run. The delay is adjustable by a setpoint (in the case of built-in alarms, analog input alarms) or is adjusted via
configuration window in InteliConfig (in the case of binary input alarms). If the conditions persist, the alarm will
activate. The alarm will not activate if the condition is dismissed while the delay is still running.
After pressing the Fault reset button or activating the binary input FAULT RESET BUTTON (PAGE 479), all active
alarms change to confirmed state. Confirmed alarms will disappear from the Alarmlist as soon as the respective
condition dismisses. If the condition is dismissed before acknowledging the alarm, the alarm will remain in the
Alarmlist as Inactive.
Note: The input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 490) can be used for temporary disabling of red alarms to shutdown the
engine. This input may be used in situations where providing the power is extremely important – e.g. if the Gen-
set drives pumps for fire extinguishers (sprinklers).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 137

DRAFT!

Alarm states
An alarm can have following states:
Active alarm: the alarm condition persists, alarm delay has elapsed.
Inactive alarm: the alarm condition has disappeared, but the alarm has not been confirmed.
Confirmed alarm: the alarm condition persists, but the alarm has already been confirmed.

Image 5.33 Alarm List

Alarm types – Level 1

The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level. This alarm does not cause any actions regarding the gen-set control.

Warning (Wrn)
The alarm appears in the Alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. Activates the output AL COMMON W RN
(PAGE 501) as well as the standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 518) and ALARM (PAGE 502)).

Alarm indication only (AL Indic)

The alarm indication only alarm does not perform any actions regarding Gen-set control. Alarm is only displayed
in alarmlist.

History record only (HistRecOnl)

The event is recorded into the history. Standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 518) and ALARM (PAGE 502)) are
not activated.

Alarm types – Level 2

The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached.
Note: It is not possible to start the engine if any red level protection is active or not confirmed.

IMPORTANT: The Gen-set can start by itself after acknowledging the alarms if there is no longer an
active red alarm and the controller is in AUTO or TEST mode!

Shutdown (Sd)
The alarm appears in the alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate stop of the Gen-set
without cooling phase. Also GCB breaker is open. The Gen-set cannot be started again while there is a
shutdown alarm in the alarmlist. Activates the output AL COMMON SD (PAGE 500) as well as the standard alarm
outputs (HORN (PAGE 518) and ALARM (PAGE 502)).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 138

DRAFT!

Breaker open and cool down (BOC)

The event appears in the alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate opening of the GCB
and then the standard stop sequence with cooling follows. The Gen-set cannot be started again while there is a
BOC alarm in the alarmlist. Activates the output AL COMMON BOC (PAGE 499) as well as the standard alarm
outputs (HORN (PAGE 518) and ALARM (PAGE 502)).
In case there is no feedback from breakers configured Breaker open and cool down will be replaced by
shutdown alarm type.

Sensor fail detection (FLS)

If the measured resistance on an analog input exceeds the valid range, a sensor fail will be detected and a
sensor fail message will appear in the Alarmlist (page 139). The valid range is defined by the most-left (RL)
and most-right (RH) points of the sensor characteristic ±12.5 % from RH-RL.
Note: Sometimes there can be problem with lower limit of valid range which can be counted as negative
number. In this case the lower limit is set as one half of the RL point of the sensor curve characteristic.

Image 5.34 Sensor fail detection principle

Remote alarm messaging

If communication plug-in module is connected to the controller, the controller can send SMS messages and
emails at the moment when a new alarm appears in the Alarmlist (page 139) or new event is written in History
log (page 106). The message will contain a copy of the Alarmlist (page 139) or reasons from History log
(page 106). To enable this function, adjust setpoints Event Message (page 366), Wrn Message (page 366),
BOC Message (page 366) and Sd Messages (page 367) to ON. Also enter a valid GSM phone number or
email address to the setpoints Telephone Number 1 (page 369), Telephone Number 2 (page 370),
Telephone Number 3 (page 370), Telephone Number 4 (page 371), Email Address 1 (page 367), Email
Address 2 (page 368),Email Address 3 (page 368), and Email Address 4 (page 369).

Alarmlist
Alarmlist is a container of active and inactive alarms. It will appear automatically on the controller display, if a
new alarm occurs, or can be displayed manually from the display menu.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 139

DRAFT!

Active alarms are shown as inverted, not yet confirmed alarms are marked with asterisk before them.
Alarmlist contains three types of alarms:
Controller built-in alarms
User configured alarms on binary or analog inputs
ECU alarms

Controller built-in alarms

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC,
MP, MPR). Then the alarm name follows. In some cases the prefix can be omitted.

User configured alarms

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC).
Alarm type is selected by user during the configuration of binary or analog input as alarm. Then the alarm name
follows. Name is adjusted by user during the configuration of binary or analog input as alarm.

ECU alarms
The ECU alarms are received from the ECU. The alarms are represented by the Diagnostic Trouble Code,
which contains information about the subsystem where the alarm occurred, the alarm type and the alarm
occurrence counter.
The most common fault codes are translated into text form. Other fault codes are displayed as a numeric code
and the engine fault codes list must be used to determine the reason.

Built-in alarms

Events Protection
Description
specification type
Battery voltage is out of limits given by Battery Undervoltage (page
Wrn Battery Voltage WRN
257) and Battery Overvoltage (page 258) setpoints.
RTC Battery Flat WRN RTC battery weak or flat and has to be changed.
If the controller switches off during starting sequence (STARTER 1
Sd Battery Flat SD (PAGE 536) output is active) it doesn't try to start again and activates
this protection (controller assumes bad battery condition).
Sd Start Fail SD Gen-set start failed. All crank attempts were tried without success.
Sd Gen Lx >V The generator voltage is out of limits given by Generator
SD
BOC Gen Lx <V Undervoltage BOC (page 269) and Generator Overvoltage Sd
BOC
(where x=1,2,3) (page 268) setpoints.

BOC Gen V The generator voltage is unbalanced more than the value of Voltage
BOC
Unbalance Unbalance BOC (page 270) setpoint.
The generator frequency is out of limits given by Generator
BOC Gen >,
BOC Overfrequency BOC (page 270) and Generator Underfrequency
<Frequency
BOC (page 271) setpoints.
BOC Current The generator current is unbalanced more than the value of Current
BOC
Unbalance Unbalance BOC (page 267) setpoint.
Generator current exceeds the limit for IDMT protection given by
BOC Current IDMT BOC
Nominal Current (page 209) and IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 140

DRAFT!

Events Protection
Description
specification type
265) setpoints.
The load is greater than the value given by Overload BOC (page
BOC Overload BOC
263) setpoint.
This alarm is activated when Earth Fault value exceeds Earth Fault
Sd Earth Fault SD
Sd (page 381) limit for at least Earth Fault Delay (page 380) period.
The protection comes active if the speed is greater than Overspeed
Sd Overspeed SD
Sd (page 249) setpoint.
During starting of the engine when the RPM reach the value of
Starting RPM (page 232) setpoint the starter is switched off and the
Sd Underspeed SD speed of the engine can drop under Starting RPM (page 232) again.
Then the Underspeed protection is active. Protection evaluation
starts 5 seconds after reaching Starting RPM (page 232).
If the input Emergency Stop is active shutdown is immediately
Emergency Stop SD
activated.
GCB Fail SD Failure of generator circuit breaker.
MCB Fail WRN Failure of mains circuit breaker.
Failure of magnetic pick-up sensor for speed measurement. This
alarm appears, if starter was disengaged for other reason than over-
Sd RPM
SD crossing Starting RPM (page 232) (like oil pressure or D+) and at
Measurement Fail
the end of timer Maximum Cranking Time (page 231) there are no
RPMs > Starting RPM (page 232) detected.
Gen-set stop failed. See description at Gen-set Operation States
Wrn Stop Fail WRN
chapter.
The period for servicing is set by the Maintenance Timer 1 (page
Wrn Maintenance 1 WRN
260) setpoint. The protection comes if counter reaches zero.
The period for servicing is set by the Maintenance Timer 2 (page
Wrn Maintenance 2 WRN
260) setpoint. The protection comes if counter reaches zero.
The period for servicing is set by the Maintenance Timer 3 (page
Wrn Maintenance 3 WRN
260) setpoint. The protection comes if counter reaches zero.
Charge Alternator
WRN Failure of alternator for charging the battery.
Fail
Wrn Override All Sd WRN The protection is active if the output Sd Override is active.
Mains voltage phases are not wired correctly. MCB closing is
Mains CCW Rot WRN
prohibited by controller.
Gen-set voltage phases are not wired correctly. GCB closing is
Generator CCW Rot WRN
prohibited by controller.
ALI Gen Ph-Rotation Mains voltage phases are not wired correctly. MCB closing is
ALI
Opposite prohibited by controller.
ALI Mains Ph- Mains voltage phases are not wired correctly. GCB closing is
ALI
Rotation Opposite prohibited by controller.
BOC Reverse Power BOC The reverse power is higher than limit adjusted via setpoint Reverse

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 141

DRAFT!

Events Protection
Description
specification type
Power Level (page 272).
MP Mains Lx >V
The mains voltage is out of limits given by Mains Overvoltage (page
MP Mains Lx <V MP
282) and Mains Undervoltage (page 283) setpoints.
(where x=1,2,3)
Mains Voltage The mains voltage is unbalanced more than the value of Mains
MP
Unbalance Voltage Unbalance (page 286) setpoint.
The mains frequency is out of limits given by Mains Overfrequency
Mains >, <Frequency MP
(page 286) and Mains Underfrequency (page 287) setpoints.

Note: This table does not contain all alarms in controller. It is only list of the most common alarms.

5.5.23 PLC
PLC Editor is powerful tool which helps you to create your own PLC scheme. It has graphical interface to have
user interface easy to use.

Image 5.35 PLC Editor main page

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 142

DRAFT!

List of available PLC blocks

PLC block Number of blocks

OR/AND 16
XOR/RS 8
Comparator with hysteresis (Comp Hyst) 4
Comparator with delay (Comp Time) 2
Timer 2
Delay 8
Counter 2

Number of blocks is for InteliLite AMF 25. Number of blocks can be different according to controller version.

Working with the editor

If the currently opened archive does not contain any PLC program, then an empty drawing is created
automatically when you select the PLC Editor. The procedure of creation of a PLC drawing (program) contains
following essential steps:
Adjust the sheet to your needs. See Working with sheets (page 143) for more information.
Add PLC blocks into the sheets. See Adding PLC blocks (page 144) for more information.
Define inputs and outputs of the PLC program. See Define inputs and outputs (page 145) for more
information.
Create connections between inputs, blocks and outputs. See Creating wires (page 147) for more
information.
Adjust properties of the blocks. See List of PLC blocks (page 551) for more information about blocks.

Working with sheets

Drag the sheet edges to re-size the sheet according to your needs.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 143

DRAFT!

Image 5.36 Adjusting PLC sheet

Adding PLC blocks

Adding PLC block is simple and intuitive. Follow the procedure below to add PLC block.
Select required block from the list of available PLC blocks at the left and drag it into the sheet.
Double-click on the block and adjust properties of the block. See List of PLC blocks (page 551) for more
information about blocks.
Connect the block inputs and outputs by drawing wires in the sheet. See Define inputs and outputs (page
145) for more information. It is also possible to connected inputs and outputs via properties of selected PLC
block.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 144

DRAFT!

Image 5.37 Adding PLC blocks

Note: To delete PLC block just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can be used.

Note: To see context help for selected PLC block just press F1 button.

Define inputs and outputs

Image 5.38 Blank sheet of PLC Editor

Inputs
Sheet inputs are located at the left side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 145

DRAFT!

Double-click on a free input position or existing input to add new input or edit the existing one.
Select the source for the input.
If you create a binary input, you can select a source from following categories:
Bin. Values – this category contains all binary values available in the controller as binary inputs,
logical binary outputs etc.
PLC Outputs – this category contains all PLC blocks binary outputs available in the controller.
If you create an analog input, you can select a source from following categories:
Ana. Values – this category contains all analog values available in the controller as analog inputs,
electrical values, values from ECU etc.
All Setpoints – this category contains all setpoints of the controller except the dedicated PLC
setpoints. Names, resolutions and dimensions of these setpoints can not be modified.
PLC Setpoints – this category contains a group of setpoints which are dedicated for using in the PLC
program. PLC setpoints can be renamed, their dimension, resolution and limits can be modified
according to need of PLC blocks where they are used.

Image 5.39 PLC inputs

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 146

DRAFT!

Outputs
Sheet outputs are located at the right side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.
Double-click on a free output position to add new sheet output.
Double-click on an already created output to configure the output onto a controller output terminal or a logical
binary input (first of all some PLC block output has to be connected to this output to enable configuration of
output).

Image 5.40 PLC outputs

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to click on Connect button after selecting the output. Otherwise PLC
output is not connected to output.

Creating wires
Wires can be create between PLC inputs and PLC blocks and between PLC blocks and PLC outputs.
IMPORTANT: Keep the order of starting and finishing connection points. Wires between inputs and
blocks have to start from inputs. Wires between blocks and outputs have to start from blocks.

Follow the procedure below to create wire:

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 147

DRAFT!

Locate the mouse pointer over the starting point of the wire. If the area under the mouse pointer is a
connection point, the pointer will change the color (fill of pointer will be white).
Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the wire to the destination of required connection point. If you
point over a valid connection point, the connection point will be marked with a red circle.
Release the left mouse button to create a wire between the two points. The wire is routed automatically.

Note: It is possible to make connection only between the outputs and inputs with the same type of value (binary
or analog). Binary values are marked by black pointer, analog values are marked with green pointer.

Note: To delete wire just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can by used.

PLC logic execution rules

The PLC program is executed every 100 ms. The blocks are executed in order according to block numbers (item
numbers), which are indicated in each block. The block numbers are assigned automatically according to
position on sheet.

Image 5.41 PLC execution logic

IMPORTANT: Please always check that the blocks are ordered correctly, especially if you use direct
feedbacks from outputs to inputs within one sheet. Wrong order may lead to incorrect results!!!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 148

DRAFT!

Other functions
Consistency check
Use this function to check if all inputs and outputs of PLC block are connected.

Delete whole content of sheet

Use this function to delete the whole content of sheet (including blocks, wires, inputs, outputs, etc...).

Hints
Use this function to enable or disable quick hints for blocks (controller help is not affected by this function).

PLC monitor
PLC Monitor is a powerful tool for monitoring your PLC. Just click on PLC Monitor button on main InteliConfig
page to see you PLC. Active inputs and outputs have blue color. Also wires with active signals have blue color.
IMPORTANT: It is not possible to edit PLC in PLC Monitor tool.

5.5.24 Geo-fencing
Geo-fencing function is kind of protection that evaluates whether the actual GPS location is within predefined
area and based on the evaluation takes an action (sends sms, stops engine, make history record etc.). Function
is enabled by setpoint Geo-Fencing (page 356) or by logical binary input GEO-FENCING ENABLE (PAGE 482).
Using InteliConfig, it is possible to set two concentric geo-circles within which the unit is allowed to be located.
Each geo-circle is defined as circular geographic area with centre (common for both geo-circles) named Home
Position adjusted via setpoints Home Latitude (page 356) and Home Longitude (page 357) and radius
named Fence Radius adjusted via setpoints .Fence Radius 1 (page 358) and Fence Radius 2 (page 360).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 149

DRAFT!

Protections can be different for both circles. Protection are adjusted via setpoints Fence 1 Protection (page
358) and Fence 2 Protection (page 359).
It is also possible to see the current position of the controller in WebSupervisor map view.

5.5.25 Tier 4 Final

Tier 4 Final support generally provides monitoring and control of after-treatment system installed on generators
engine. The requirements are defined as:
Providing After-Treatment status information by
Displaying universal lamps (icons)
Displaying analog and binary values
Control of After-Treatment regeneration function by
Transmitting commands to the ECU

Providing After-treatment status information

After-Treatment screen
This screen is shown with configured ECU which supports Tier 4 Final. After-Treatment screen is automatically
shown, once any of selected lamps gets active or change status. Deactivating of the lamp will not trigger
showing the screen. The screen is then shown until operator switch it to another one. Alarmlist screen has lower
priority so even new alarm appears, After-treatment screen is still displayed. To avoid displaying blank screen,
inactive lamps are represented by "dotted" icons. For no active lamp the screen shows all dotted icons. Please
see examples below:

Image 5.42 Example of active Tier 4 Final screen

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 150

DRAFT!

Image 5.43 Example of inactive Tier 4 Final screen

Universal lamps (icons)

Universal lamp icons are shown on the After-Treatment screen. Based on specific value read in specific frame
with specific SPN is every lamp icon either:
shown
hidden
blinking slow (1 Hz)
blinking fast (2 Hz)

Note: Lamp icon blinking is defined as displaying active lamp icon and inverse colored active lamp icon in
required frequency.

Lamp name Active icon Inactive icon Notes

Note: This value can light

Amber warning lamp
or blink on both frequencies.

Note: This value can light

Red stop lamp
or blink on both frequencies.

Engine wait to start lamp

Note: Indicates the After-

Treatment filter needs to be
DPF/SCR lamp command regenerated. This lamp also
activates alarm AHI ATT
Filter Lamp (page 586).

Note: This lamp also

Exhaust system high temperature
activates alarm After-
lamp command
Treatment (page 1).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 151

DRAFT!

Lamp name Active icon Inactive icon Notes

Note: This value can light

or blink on both frequencies.
Malfunction indicator lamp This lamp also activates
alarm After-Treatment
(page 1).

Note: This lamp also

Fluid tank low level indicator activates alarm After-
Treatment (page 1).

Note: Indicates the state of

diesel particulate filter
active regeneration
DPF regeneration inhibited
inhibition. This lamp also
activates alarm After-
Treatment (page 1).

Analog values
Supported analog values:
DPF Ash Load (page 1)
DPF Soot Load (page 1)
DEF Level (page 1)

Control of After-Treatment regeneration function

User can force or inhibit regeneration process by activating appropriate binary inputs of the controller. Please
see the list of binary inputs below:
FORCE REGENERATIONREGENERATION FORCE (PAGE 1)
REGENERATION INHIB (PAGE 1)

5.5.26 Alternate configuration

In controller are 3 sets of configuration.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 152

DRAFT!

Configuration set 1 Configuration set 2 Configuration set 3

Nominal Power Split Phase 1 Nominal Power Split Phase 2 Nominal Power Split Phase 3
(page 389) (page 395) (page 401)
Nominal Power 1 (page 388) Nominal Power 2 (page 394) Nominal Power 3 (page 400)
Nominal RPM 1 (page 383) Nominal RPM 2 (page 389) Nominal RPM 3 (page 395)
Nominal Frequency 1 (page 384) Nominal Frequency 2 (page 390) Nominal Frequency 3 (page 396)
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page
384) 390) 396)
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page
384) 390) 396)
Nominal Current 1 (page 385) Nominal Current 2 (page 391) Nominal Current 3 (page 397)
Connection Type 1 (page 385) Connection type 2 (page 391) Connection type 3 (page 397)
ECU Speed Adjustment 1 (page ECU Speed Adjustment 2 (page ECU Speed Adjustment 3 (page
388) 394) 400)

Configuration sets can be changed via logical binary inputs ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 472) and ALTERNATE
CONFIG 3 (PAGE 472). Configuration set 1 is active when there is no input activated. In case that inputs
ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 472) and ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 472) are active at the same time, the
configuration set 3 is took in account.

ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 472) ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 472) Active configuration set
0 0 1
1 0 2
0 1 3
1 1 3

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 156

DRAFT!

Point 12 – Pop-up message

Confirmation of configuration download
Point 11 – Configuration download
Current archive is download to USB key (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM).
History record "USB key Archive download" is made
Confirmation pop-up message: "Archive download successful"

5.5.28 E-Stop
Binary outputs for the control of some essential functions are internally wired as "safe", it means, that their
deactivation is directly bind with the dedicated Input E-STOP (not evaluated as the LBI in the controller). This
BO are fully configurable and are used e.g. for the Starter and Fuel control.
The emergency stop circuit must be secured.
No accidental activation on the PCB, circuit must disable the operation of the emergency stop.
The power supply of the associated binary outputs (BOUT1 and BOUT2) is supplied by the E-STOP input,
not by the + battery voltage.
Note: There is no difference int the way of configuration of all binary outputs. Binary outputs BO1 (Starter), BO2
(Fuel Solenoid) are intended for these functions (not dedicated).

There is a measuring of E-STOP input voltage analogically and setting the binary value (representing
emergency stop input level) based on comparison of the measured voltage to two analog levels, which are
derived from the controller supply voltage (battery voltage) perceptually.

Image 5.45 SW principle of E-STOP

If the input voltage of E-stop is higher than high comparison level (for ex. higher than 80% of the supply
voltage), then E-stop is not activated.
If the input voltage of E-stop is lower than low comparison level (for ex. lower than 60% of the supply
voltage), then E-stop is activated.
If the input voltage of E-stop is located somewhere between low and high comparison levels (for ex. between 60
and 80 %of the supply voltage, then E-stop binary value will stay on its previous state (means E-stop binary
value will not change).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 157

DRAFT!

Visualization on CU screen
1 – E-STOP has voltage – state is OK
0 – E-STOP has no voltage – protection is active
For more information about connection see Emergency stop on page 48.

5.5.29 ECU Frequency selection

Setpoint ECU Freq Select is no longer in use. However ECU Frequency Select (page 408) value was kept
and the value can be calculated from Nominal Frequency (page 217) setpoint. Sequence for frequency
change is executed automatically (engine must be in still condition and ECU is powered on – ECU Power Relay
is not configured) in following steps:
1. Starting of the engine is blocked (state: Not Ready)
2. Wait 100 ms
3. ECU Stop Pulse is set for 1000 ms (standard Stop Pulse duration)
4. Wait 3000 ms
5. Frequency selection is changed to a new value
6. Wait 2000 ms
7. ECU Stop Pulse is set for 1000 ms (standard Stop Pulse duration)
8. Wait 2000 ms
9. Come back from start blocking state
This sequence does not control LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) anyhow.
Note: If LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) is used, this change can be made only in prestart phase. So
prestart has to be set up for enough long time.

5.5.30 User Buttons

User button is a binary signal which value can be set several ways due to the user need (activation conditions).
There are up to 32 binary signals – User Buttons – which can be activated or deactivated by various types of
user interaction with the system. These binary signals are associated into the Binary Values of 32 bits. Each
particular signal is available for configuration as an source of binary signal – e.g. for physical Binary output,
Input of PLC logic, Modbus coil, Tx module of shared signals etc.

Value User Buttons

Value name = User Buttons
Group = User Buttons – placed upon the group "Log Bout".
Visible = all the time
Application = All

Mode setting
There are the following modes of operation (can be set by an individual setpoint for each User button):
MAN ON
MAN OFF
COMMAND

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 158

DRAFT!

FIXED ON
If the selection setpoint is set to FIXED ON, corresponding User Button is activated and its state cannot be
changed by command. In PC monitoring tool there is a graphical interface clustering all manual settings together
(example shown in the diagram above) i.e. there is a GUI for manual control of userbuttons or selection of
command control. Changes in this GUI directly change the value of the setpoint (redundant access to these
settings).

FIXED OFF
If the selection setpoint is set to FIXED OFF, corresponding User Button is deactivated and its state cannot be
changed by command. In PC monitoring tool there is a graphical interface clustering all manual settings together
(example shown in the diagram above) i.e. there is a GUI for manual control of userbuttons or selection of
command control. Changes in this GUI directly change the value of the setpoint (redundant access to these
settings).

COMMAND
In PC monitoring tool there is a graphical interface clustering all manual settings together (example shown in
diagram above) i.e. there is a GUI for manual control of userbuttons or selection of command control.
There are several commands available (all commands can be used when the mode is set to COMMAND). The
GUI provides easy access to issue commands when COMMAND mode is selected. Commands can be also
sent from other sources (display, SCADA, third party device etc.).
COMMAND ON and COMMAND OFF
User Button state is determined by commands (can be sent from HMI, Modbus etc.). When a command
ON is received, User Button is activated. Subsequent commands ON when User Button is active have
no effect. If a command OFF is received, User Button is deactivated. Subsequent commands OFF when
User Button is inactive have no effect.
COMMAND TOGGLE (previously named ON/OFF)
User Button state is determined by a command (can be sent from HMI, Modbus etc.). When a command
TOGGLE is received, User Button is activated. Next command TOGGLE when User Button is active
deactivates User Button and so on.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 159

DRAFT!

COMMAND PULSE
User Button state is determined by a command (can be sent from HMI, Modbus etc.).
When a command PULSE is received, User Button is activated for the set duration.
Pulse length is 200 ms (user can use this pulse in PLC to prolong it using e.g. block Delay)
Consequent commands PULSE sent during duration of the pulse prolong the duration accordingly.
When the setting of pulse duration is changed while the pulse is active, the current pulse will have the
original duration and the new setting is applied for the next pulse.
If the User Button is active (as a result of COMMAND ON or COMMAND TOGGLE) and COMMAND
PULSE comes, User Button remains active for the duration of the pulse and then it deactivates.
While a pulse is active (duration of the pulse) and COMMAND ON, COMMAND OFF or COMMAND
TOGGLE comes, the pulse is canceled. Next state depends on the canceling command:
COMMAND ON – User Button remains active until COMMAND OFF or COMMAND TOGGLE
comes
COMMAND OFF or COMMAND TOGGLE – User Button deactivates until COMMAND ON,
COMMAND TOGGLE or COMMAND PULSE come

Access rights
In sense of access rules the user buttons are grouped to groups of 8 user buttons.
User Button 1-8
User Button 9-16
User Button 17-24
User Button 25-32
It is possible to set the access level for each of these 4 commands separately in access rules management
menu.

5.5.31 User management and data access control

Accessing, monitoring and controlling the device via any communication interface require an user to be
logged-in.
When a task (read data, write data , control) is to be performed the access level of the user who is currently
logged-in must be higher or equal to the access level required for the particular task.
User must have her/his user account defined by the administrator of the controller before she/he can log-in
into the controller and perform monitoring, control or configuration tasks.

Types of interfaces
The controller communication interfaces are split into two categories according to what kind of environment the
interface is exposed.
Trusted
Are USB, RS232, RS485, On board RS485 interfaces. It is expected that these interfaces are operated
locally inside a closed environment / infrastructure where additional measures against misuse or attack
take place (e.g. physical access limitation). Due to nature of this interface less strict cybersecurity rules
apply at it and that is why Implicit account is introduced here to make working with the controller simpler.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 160

DRAFT!

Untrusted
Is Ethernet interface. This interface is a general-purpose one and it is expected that it may be exposed to
public networks, such as Internet, which are not under control of the entity operating the controller. Thus,
strict cybersecurity rules apply for this type of interface.

User accounts
User account must be created in the controller by administrator before the particular user can login to the
controller.
Note: User accounts must be created for each controller separately and manually. It is not possible to transfer
the accounts from one controller to another.

User account has following properties

Consists of 6-15 alphanumeric characters, must contain at least 1 letter. This is the
Username
main identifier of the particular user account.
Consists of 6-15 alphanumeric characters, must contain at least 1 letter and 1 digit.
Password
This is the password that is used together with user name to authenticate (log-in).
Optional 4-digit identification string which can be used for simplified login at trusted
User identifier (UID)
interfaces (e.g. from InteliVision display when connected via Ethernet.
PIN 4-digit “password” to be used together with UID.
Access level Determines Access to controller data (page 165)

User login
To login to the controller the username and password must be provided into the login form of the
application (InteliConfig (page 13), WebSupervisor (page 13), Remote Display (page 85).
Alternatively, at trusted interfaces, it is possible to login using UID and PIN instead of username and
password. This method of login is designed to simplify the login procedure at devices without alphanumeric
keyboard (e.g. InteliVision).
Note: The controller is featured with a protection against brute force attack to user account credentials. For
details see Account break protection on page 165.

Changing password and PIN

The password and/or PIN for currently logged user can be changed. The user must be logged with username
and password even if PIN has to be changed.

Production mode
By default the controller has turned on Production mode. Production mode allows you to work with the controller
without the need to log in as an administrator (access level 3) when connected through trusted interface. All
operations for which an administrator account is usually required are enabled even without logging in (e.g.
writing the configuration). This can be potentially risky, therefore there is active alarm Wrn Production Mode
(page 599) in the alarm list. To turn off the Production mode go to User management and uncheck the checkbox
Production mode or go to Production Mode display screen and select disable. Once it is done the warning
disappears and it will not be possible to work with the controller as an administrator without log in.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 161

DRAFT!

Factory default accounts

Each controller comes from the production with one factory default administrator account having following
credentials:
Username: "administrator"
Password: <serial number of the controller>
When the controller is being configured for operation the desired user accounts including the administrator
account should be created and then the factory default account must be deleted.
IMPORTANT: Adjust the backup e-mail address before you delete the default administrator
account. This address is used as second authentication factor in password reset request and the
password reset action code will be sent to this and only this e-mail address.

Note: There must always remain at least one administrator account in the system. The controller will not allow
deleting last administrator account.

Reset accounts to factory default

If credentials (username and/or password) for administrator account are lost, it is possible to reset all user
accounts to the factory default state.
1. Connect InteliConfig to the controller
2. Read the Password Reset Request Code (PRRC)

3. You may disconnect from the InteliConfig now

4. Put the PRRC code into the "IntelliBot" application at www.comap-control.com/support or e-mail the code to
[email protected].
5. A unique, one-time Password Reset Action Code (PRAC) will be sent to the backup e-mail address adjusted
in the controller.
6. Connect via InteliConfig to the controller again

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 162

DRAFT!

7. Enter the Password Reset Action Code into the appropriate form

8. Now the user accounts are in factory default state

Managing accounts
User accounts can be managed from InteliConfig while an online connection to the controller is established. An
user with administrator level must be logged with username/password and is prompted to re-enter accounts
password before the user management dialog is opened.
IMPORTANT: The total available number of accounts in the controller is 5.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 163

DRAFT!

Adding account
Click on "+" button in the lower left corner of the user management window, then provide the account properties
as described in User accounts (page 161).
Note: Rules for the User accounts (page 161) credentials apply and some items are optional

Deleting account
Select the account that has to be deleted and click on "-" button in the lower left part of the user management
window.
Note: You can not delete your own administrator account unless there is another administrator account present
in the controller.

Deleting account properties

Select the account that has to be deleted and click on "-" button in the lower left part of the user management
window. Then modify the desired property or properties. You can modify one or more properties at once.

Note: It is not possible to change user name or UID. Instead of this create a new account with the required
changes and delete the original one.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 164

DRAFT!

Account break protection

The controller is protecting the user accounts against breaking by a brute-force attack, i.e against breaking into
the controller by fast repeating attempts to login with credentials generated from the range of all possible
combinations.
If the account break protection detects a possible attack and blocks an account or interface the alarm Wrn
Brute Force Protection Active (page 600) is activated. The alarm can be used to send an active message
(e.g. e-mail) to inform about that situation The detailed behavior of the controller depends on situation.

Password protection
1. If an user performs five consecutive attempts to login using username/password, providing correct
username but incorrect password, the respective user account is blocked for a time period of 1 minute. The
attempts count regardless of the interface from which it is performed.
2. During the blocking period it is not possible to login with the respective account (username) from any
interface even if correct password is provided.
3. After the blocking period elapsed next attempt to login with the respective account (username) is possible. If
this attempt fails again the account is blocked again, now for period of 2 minutes.
4. The points 1-3 repeats further, the blocking period is multiplied by 2 in each next cycle. However, the
maximal blocking time is 20 minutes, the blocking time is never higher.

PIN protection
If an user performs ten consecutive attempts to login using UID/PIN, providing correct UID but incorrect
PIN, the user account is permanently blocked for login using UID/PIN. The user must login with
username/password and change the PIN to unblock this login method again.

Interface protection
If anyone performs twenty consecutive attempts to login via one particular interface and does not neither
provide a valid username nor a valid uid the respective interface is blocked for 2 minutes.
During this period it is not possible to use that interface for any login. The blocking period is not progressive in
this case.

Access to controller data

Every request for reading data from the controller or writing data into it requires an user to be logged and that
user must have access level higher or equal to the access level defined for the particular object and
operation.
There are 4 access levels available (level 0 to level 3). The level 3 is administrator level and users who have
this level have full control over the controller.

Reading data
The access level required for reading data from controller is fixedly adjusted to 0. That means reading of data
(except some system objects) is available for any user.

Writing data
The access level required to write (modify) application setpoints or invoke application commands is
configurable via InteliConfig.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 165

DRAFT!

Special situations
There are several operations that require administrator level:
Programming firmware
Programming configuration
Managing user accounts

5.5.32 User setpoints

Controller allows user to create their own setpoints, edit and delete the created setpoints and choose a group in
which the setpoint will be located. Number of setpoints created by user is limited to 2047. All setpoints created
by user are located in Group: User Setpoints (page 295). The Comm. object number (CO) can be found via
InteliConfig (Tools tab → Generate Cfg image (COM)). User setpoints can be used to manage User protections
and PLC.

Add User setpoint

Delete selected User setpoint

Edit selected User setpoint

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 166

DRAFT!

Image 5.46 Setting parameters of an user setpoint

Contents of the user setpoint

Max. 32 characters
Name Note: Does not consider duplicities (It is possible to have setpoints with the same
name, but it is not recommended.)
Can be chosen from a list or
Dimension
User can create their own with a limit of 32 characters.
Resolution Max. 4 decimal place
Range of the data type INT32 (restricted by resolution).
Low Limit Value is set as a constant (can not be set as setpoint).
Max. value cannot exceed High Limit.
Range of the data type INT32 (restricted by resolution).
High Limit Value is set as a constant (can not be set as setpoint).
Min. value cannot be lower than Low Limit.
Default value Must be in range between Low and High Limit (restricted by resolution).
Group in which setpoint will be shown.
Group
Position of a setpoint in a list.
Subgroup Subgroup in which setpoint will be shown.

5.5.33 Cybernetic security

The cybernetic security is formed by:
Hardening the storage of a credentials
Protection against a brute-force attack to the password
Secure method to reset the password
A new technology of encryption of the remote communication
Web interface can be disabled

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 167

DRAFT!

Hardening the storage of a credentials

The user credentials (passwords and access code) have been moved to a hardened storage to prevent the
credentials to leak out of the hardware.
IMPORTANT: If a firmware rollback is inevitable, please keep in mind, when the firmware is first
time updated to the new firmware (which uses hardened storage) a seamless transfer of the
credentials into the hardened storage is performed. However, if the rollback to any previous
firmware (which does not use hardened storage) is performed the credentials are NOT transferred
back, so the previous firmware will not "see" any change of the credentials made through the new
firmware. Moreover, as the transfer of the credentials into the hardened storage is performed only
during very first update from an "old" to a "new" firmware, no change of the credentials performed
in the "old" firmware after the rollback will be visible in the "new" firmware after a next update to
the "new" firmware.

Protection against the brute force attack

Protection against the brute force will take a place when an invalid password is entered repeatedly.
If the invalid password is entered 5 times, the controller gets blocked for entering password for a while.
Each further entering of the invalid password cause the consequent blocking time is increased.
If the invalid password is entered repeatedly the controller gets blocked for entering the password
permanently and the password must be reset to a default value as described below.
Note: Blocking of the controller for entering the password have no influence to controller / Gen-setoperation

Note: Permanent blocking cannot occur accidentally, just by user mistake. It can be practically triggered only
by a focused activity.

Resetting the administrator password

If the administrator password is lost or controller is permanently locked due to brute-force attack
protection, proceed according to a procedure described below:
IMPORTANT: There is a backup e-mail address defined in the controller to which and only which
ComAp will send the "password reset action code". Please be sure, that you have adjusted this e-
mail address correctly. Use InteliConfig to adjust the backup e-mail address

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 171

DRAFT!

6 Communication
6.1 PC 172
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 186

6 back to Table of contents

6.1 PC
6.1.1 Direct communication 172
6.1.2 Remote communication 174

6.1.1 Direct communication

A RS232, USB, RS485 or ethernet interface can be used for direct cable connection to a PC.

Connection via RS232

A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS232 connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 55.
RS232 interface uses COM1 Mode (page 377) port of the controller. Use a cross-wired serial communication
cable with DB9 female connectors and signals Rx, Tx, GND.
Note: Also USB-RS232 convertor can be used.

Image 6.1 Cross-wired RS232 cable is used

Image 6.2 Cross-wired RS232 cable and USB is used

Connection via RS485

Plug-in module CM-RS232-485 or on board RS485 connector can be used for communication via RS485
connection.
A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS485 connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 55.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 172

DRAFT!

RS485 interface uses COM2 Mode (page 378) port of the controller.
Note: Also USB-RS485 convertor can be used.

Image 6.3 Plug-in module CM RS232-485 is used

Connection via Onboard RS485

RS485 interface uses RS485 Mode (page 228) port of the controller.
Note: Also USB-RS485 convertor can be used.

Connection via Ethernet

A plug-in communication module CM-Ethernet is necessary for Ethernet connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 55.
This connection type is used for communication with the controller from InteliConfig or any other PC tool. This
connection can be used regardless of AirGate is switched on or off. Only three remote clients can be connected
at the same time (via AirGate only two remote clients at the same time). Eight remote clients can be connected
at the same time (six direct IP clients and two AirGate clients).
To connect your PC tool to the controller use the INTERNET connection type and just put the CM-Ethernet IP
address into the gen-set address box in the PC tool. If you do not use the default ComAp TCP Port (page 1)
23, then you also have to specify the port number using a colon.

Image 6.4 Ethernet cable is used

Connection via USB

USB interface uses HID profile.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 173

DRAFT!

Image 6.5 Shielded USB type A cable is used

6.1.2 Remote communication

A PC can be connected to the controller also remotely via CM-GPRS or CM-Ethernet plug-in module or the built-
in Ethernet interface.
IMPORTANT: Factory default password and access code are "0". It is highly recommended to
change these parameters.

Ethernet LAN connection

Direct IP LAN connection is intended to be used if the CM-Ethernet module is reachable from the client
computer by specifying the IP address at which the module can be contacted.
If direct IP connection is to be used within a local network the CM-Ethernet must have static IP address in
the respective local network.
Note: If you have troubles with setting up static and public IP address for direct connection from Internet try
using AirGate connection instead.

Image 6.6 Ethernet LAN connection

Setting-up static IP address

There are two basic ways to get the static IP address.
First way is to switch theCM-Ethernet to manual IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode
(page 1) to FIXED. In that case all setpoints of IP settings(IP Address (page 1), Subnet Mask (page 1),
Gateway IP (page 1), DNS IP Address 1 (page 1)) have to be adjusted manually. If this method is used
several basic rules should be kept to avoid conflicts with the remaining network infrastructure:

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 174

DRAFT!

The static IP used in the controller must be selected in accordance with the local network in which CM-
Ethernet is connected.
The static IP used in the controller must be excluded from the pool of addresses which is assigned by
DHCP server, which is in charge of the respective local network.
The local infrastructure must generally allow using devices with manually assigned IP addresses.
There must not be any other device using the same static IP address. This can be tested from a computer
connected to the same network using "ping <required_ip_address>" command issued from the command
line. The IP address is not occupied if there is not any response to the ping command.
Note: The list above contains only basic rules. Other specific restrictions/rules may take place depending on
the local network security policy, technology used, topology etc.

Next way is to switch the CM-Ethernet to automatic IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode
(page 1) to AUTOMATIC. In that case all IP settings are assigned by DHCP server. Then configure the DHCP
server to assign always the same IP address (i.e. static IP address) to the particular CM-Ethernet according to
it's MAC address.

Internet connection
Public static IP
If public static IP connection is to be used from the Internet, the IP address, which is entered into the client
computer, must be static and public in scope of the Internet.
If CM-Ethernet is connected to Internet via a local Ethernet network then in most cases port forwarding
must be created from the public IP address of the network gateway to the local IP address of CM-
Ethernet at the port specified for ComAp protocol. Different port numbers can be used to create multiple
port forwarding rules in the same local network.

AirGate
This connection type is intended for remote connection from InteliConfig,or any other ComAp PC tool over the
Internet in situations, where obtaining fixed public IP address is not possible. Only two remote clients can be
connected at the same time.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 175

DRAFT!

This connection type is active if AirGate connection is enabled. Setpoint AirGate Address (page 373) must
contain AirGate server address. It can be entered in text form as well as numeric form. There is a public AirGate
server available at address "airgate.comap.cz".
Once the controller is attached to the Internet and the AirGate server address is properly adjusted then the
controller registers automatically to the server and an identification string AirGate ID is given to a controller,
which is visible at the controller screen.
To connect your PC tool to the controller use the AirGate connection, put the the same AirGate address as in
the controller into the AIRGATE ADDRESS field and use the AirGate ID displayed on the controller.

SMS

Event SMS
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS communication module is able to send
Event SMS according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 366)

Note: Firstly setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 369) has to be adjusted.

The following events can be received by mobile phone:

Alarm Email
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM-Ethernet communication module is able to send Alarm Emails
according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 366)
Sd Messages (page 367)
BOC Message (page 366)

Note: Firstly setpoints Email Address 1 (page 367) and SMTP Sender Address (page 1) (for CM-GPRS) or
SMTP Sender Address (page 1) (for CM-Ethernet) have to be adjusted.

Note: Summer Time Mode (page 331) and Time Zone (page 372) have to be adjusted for correct time in
emails.

DRAFT!

Measurement
Click to the MEASUREMENT link in the toolbar to display the measurement page. Then click to the required
group name in the left box to display values of the group in the right box.
Note: The measurement page is automatically refreshed every 60 seconds (this time cannot be changed).

Image 6.9 Web Server – measurement screen

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 183

DRAFT!

Setpoints
Click to the SETPOINTS link in the toolbar to display the setpoints page.
Click to the required group name in the left box to display setpoints of the group in the right box.
Click to the required setpoint name or value to change the value. If the respective setpoint is protected by
password, which is indicated by a lock icon by the setpoint name, you have to click on the "Controller
password" icon located in the toolbar and then enter valid password.

Image 6.10 Web Server – Setpoints screen

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 184

SNMP reserved objects

Name OID Access Data type Meaning

Writing: command argument
pfActionArgument groupWrFix.24550 read,write Gauge32
Reading: command return value
pfActionCommand groupW.24551 write Integer32 Command code *)
pfPassword groupW.24524 write Integer32 Password

Note: *)
For list of commands, arguments and description of the procedure of invoking commands see the description of
the Modbus protocol.

6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP

MODBUS protocol is used for integration of the controller into a building management system or for remote
monitoring via 3rd party monitoring tools.
MODBUS-RTU can be used on serial interfaces (CM-RS232-485 module is requiredvia on board RS485
connector or via CM-RS232-485 communication module). The MODBUS-RTU server must be activated by
switching the setpoint COM1 Mode (page 377) or COM2 Mode (page 378) into the Modbus position. The
serial speed for MODBUS-RTU communication is to be adjusted by the setpoint COM1 MODBUS
Communication Speed (page 378) or COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed (page 379).
MODBUS/TCP can be used on the Ethernet interface (CM-Ethernet module is required). Up to 2 clients can
be connected simultaneously. The MODBUS/TCP server must be activated by the setpoint MODBUS
Server (page 1).
MODBUS, MODBUS/TCP protocol can be used simultaneously with Web connection and direct Ethernet /
AirGate connection.
IMPORTANT: Do not write setpoint repeatedly (e.g. power control form a PLC repeated writing of
baseload setpoint via Modbus). The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory. which can be
5
overwritten up to 10 times without risk of damage or data loss, but may become damaged, when
the allowed number of writing cycles is exceeded!

Note: Modbus-RTU serial communication mode is 8-N-1 – startbit 1, 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stopbit.

Address space
The object address space is separated into several areas as described in the table below. The actual mapping of
specific controller data objects to specific Modbus addresses, which depends on configuration, can be exported
into a text file from the appropriate controller archive using InteliConfig. There are several special registers with
fixed meaning (reserved registers) which are listed in a separate table in this chapter.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 188

DRAFT!

MODBUS MODICON object

Meaning Access MODBUS function
address type
0000 .. 0999 Binary objects Read only Discrete Inputs Read: 01, 02
1000 .. 2999 Values Read only Input Registers Read: 03, 04
Read: 03, 04
3000 .. 3999 Setpoints Read/Write Holding Registers
Write: 06, 16
Reserved Read/Write, depends on Input Registers Read: 03, 04
4200 .. 7167
registers each specific register Holding Registers Write: 06, 16

Mapping data types to registers

As there are multiple data types in the controller but only one data type in MODBUS (the register, which is 2
byte long), a mapping table is necessary to compose and decompose the MODBUS messages correctly.

Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB = sign extension
Integer8 1-byte signed integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = 0
Unsigned8 1-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = value, MSB
Integer16 2-byte signed integer 1
LSB = value, LSB
MSB = value, MSB
Unsigned16 2-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB = value, LSB
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2
Integer32 4-byte signed integer 2
MSB2 = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2
Unsigned32 4-byte unsigned integer 2
MSB2 = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB = 0
Binary8 8-bit binary value 1
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB = value, bits 8-15
Binary16 16-bit binary value 1
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB1 = value, bits 24-31
LSB1 = value, bits 16-23
Binary32 32-bit binary value 2
MSB2 = value, bits 8-15
LSB2 = value, bits 0-7
Char 1-byte ASCII character 1 MSB = 0

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 189

DRAFT!

Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
LSB = ASCII value of the character
MSB = 0
StrList Index into a list of strings 1
LSB = index into the list
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
Zero-terminated string of
ShortStr 8 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 15 ASCII characters.
LSB2 = ASCII value of the 4. character
…
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
Zero-terminated string of
LongStr 16 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 31 ASCII characters.
LSB2 = ASCII value of the 4. character
…
MSB1 = BCD (dd)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Date Date (dd-mm-yy) 2
MSB2 = BCD (yy)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = BCD (hh)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Time Time (hh-mm-ss) 2
MSB2 = BCD (ss)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = reserved for future use
LSB1 = reserved for future use
MSB2 = Alarm level *)
LSB2 = Alarm status **)
Alarm An item of the Alarmlist 27 MSB3 = alarm string ***)
LSB3 = alarm string
MSB4 = alarm string
LSB5 = alarm string
…

Note:
*) 1 .. level 1 (yellow), 2 .. level 2 (red), 3 .. sensor fail
**) Bit0 – alarm is active, Bit1 – alarm is confirmed
***) String encoding is UTF-8

Error codes (exception codes)

Exception code is returned by the controller (server) if the query sent from the client could not be completed
successfully.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 190

DRAFT!

The controller responds with the error codes in as follows:

01 – Ilegal function is returned if an incompatible type of operation is applied for a specific object, e.g. if
function 03 is applied to a binary object.
02 – illegal address is returned if the client tries to perform an operation with a object address that is not
related to any existing object or that is located inside an object which is composed by multiple addresses
(registers).
04 – device error is returned in all other errorneous situations. More detailed specification of the problem can
be consequently obtained by reading the registers 4205 – 4206.

Reserved registers
There are several registers with specific meaning. These registers are available in all controllers regardless of
the configuration.

Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
4200 - 4201 2 read/write Time RTC Time in BCD code
4202 - 4203 2 read/write Date RTC Date in BCD code
Index of the language that is used for text
4204 1 read/write Unsigned8 data provided by MODBUS (e.g. alarmlist
messages).
Last application error. To be read after the
4205 - 4206 2 read Unsigned32 device returns the exception code 04. It
contains specific information about the error.
Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
Reading: command return value
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code
4010 1 - - Not implemented
4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password
4212 - 4213 2 read Unsigned32 Communication status
4214 1 read Unsigned8 Number of items in the Alarmlist
4215 - 4241 27 read Alarm 1. record in alarm list
4242 - 4268 27 read Alarm 2. record in alarm list
4269 - 4295 27 read Alarm 3. record in alarm list
4296 - 4322 27 read Alarm 4. record in alarm list
4323 - 4349 27 read Alarm 5. record in alarm list
4350 - 4376 27 read Alarm 6. record in alarm list
4377 - 4403 27 read Alarm 7. record in alarm list
4404 - 4430 27 read Alarm 8. record in alarm list
4431 - 4457 27 read Alarm 9. record in alarm list
4458 - 4484 27 read Alarm 10. record in alarm list
4485 - 4511 27 read Alarm 11. record in alarm list

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 191

DRAFT!

Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
4512 - 4538 27 read Alarm 12. record in alarm list
4539 - 4565 27 read Alarm 13. record in alarm list
4566 - 4592 27 read Alarm 14. record in alarm list
4593 - 4619 27 read Alarm 15. record in alarm list
4620 - 4646 27 read Alarm 16. record in alarm list

List of commands and arguments

"Commands" are used to invoke a specific action in the controller via the communication channel. The list of
available actions is in the table below. The general procedure of writing a command via Modbus is as follows:
1. (Optional) Write required level of password into the register 44212 (register address 4211). Use function 6. If
the password is required or not depends on configuration of access rules. It can be adjusted/modified by
InteliConfig.
2. Write the command argument into the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208). Use function
16.
3. Write the command code into the register 44210 (register address 4209). Use function 6.
4. (Optional) Read the command return value from the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208).
Use function 3.
5. If the command was executed the return value is as listed in the table. If the command was accepted but
there was an error during execution the return value indicates the reason:
a. 0x00000001 – invalid argument
b. 0x00000002 – command refused (e.g. controller not in MAN, breaker can not be closed in the specific
situation etc.)

Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start *) 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop *) 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE
Fault reset *) 0x01 0x08F70000 0x000008F8
Horn reset *) 0x01 0x04FB0000 0x000004FC
GCB toggle *) 0x02 0x11EE0000 0x000011EF
GCB on 0x02 0x11EF0000 0x000011F0
GCB off 0x02 0x11F00000 0x000011F1
MCB toggle *) 0x02 0x12ED0000 0x000012EE
MCB on 0x02 0x12EE0000 0x000012EF
MCB off 0x02 0x12EF0000 0x000012F0

Note: *)
This action is an equivalent of pressing the front panel button

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 192

DRAFT!

MODBUS examples
Modbus RTU examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Export table of values from InteliConfig

Table: Values
Allowed Modbus functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Controller
01053 8213 BatteryVoltage V Integer 2 1 0 400
I/O

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 1D 00 01 15 3C
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
041Dhex = 1053dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 F0 B8 00
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
02hex = 2 bytes read 00F0hex = 240dec

We read value 240 from register 01053. From table of Modbus registers we get dimension of read value and
"Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So battery voltage is 24.0 V.
Reading Nominal power
Export table of values from InteliConfig

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
01228 9018 Nominal Power kW Integer 2 0 0 32767 Generator

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 CC 00 01 45 05
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
04CChex = 1228dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 C8 B9 D2
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
02hex = 2 bytes read 00C8hex = 200dec

Read nominal power is 200 kW.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 193

DRAFT!

Reading all binary inputs as Modbus register

Table: Values
Allowed Modbus functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Binary
01068 8235 Binary#2 2 0 - - Controller I/O
Inputs

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 2C 00 01 44 F3
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
042Chex = 1068dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 12 38 49
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
02hex = 2 bytes read 0012hex = 00010010bin

Binary inputs is 00010010. It means Binary input 2 and binary input 5 are active.
Note: You can use Modbus function 4 instead of 3, rest of data remain same (CRC differs).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 194

DRAFT!

Reading binary inputs as coil status.

Table: Binaries
Allowed Modbus functions: 01, 02
Addresses Source
C.O.# Name of Value Bit Name
Modbus Addr. = Value Bit # Group
State # Name of State Activated by protection(s):
Prot. Addr. = State
00000 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 1 GCB Feedback Controller I/O
00001 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 2 MCB Feedback Controller I/O
00002 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 3 Emergency Stop Controller I/O

We will read state of MCB Feedback binary input.

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 01 00 01 00 01 AC 0A
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
0001hex = 0001dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 01 01 01 90 48
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
01hex = 1 byte read 01hex = active

The read data is 01, it means this binary input is active.

Note: You can use Modbus function 2 instead of 1, rest of data remains same (CRC differs).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 195

DRAFT!

Starting the engine

Before starting engine you may need to write password. Depends on your settings in controller.
Table Reserved registers (page 191)

Register addresses Number of registers Access Data type Meaning

Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
Reading: command return value
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code

Table List of commands and arguments (page 192)

Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE

Request 1/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 10 10 6F 00 03 06
Modbus function Register address
Controller address Number of registers Data length in bytes
10hex = 16dec 106Fhex = 4207dec

Request 2/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 FE 00 00 00 01 68 0B
Argument Command code CRC

Note: Command and argument may be written as one "packet" (function 16) or you can split it and write
argument (function 16) and after that write command code (function 6).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 196

DRAFT!

Password
This password is the same as in InteliConfig or directly in controller.
Table Reserved registers (page 191)

Register addresses Number of registers Access Data type Meaning

4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password

Note: Default password is "0".

In this example the password is "1234".

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 10 73 04 D2 7C D1
Register address Password
Controller address Modbus function CRC
1073hex = 4211dec 04D2hex = 1234dec

Response for success: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 10 73 00 00 7C D1
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero. CRC
1073hex = 4211dec

Response for bad password: (Numbers in Hex)

01 86 04 43 A3
Controller Modbus exception 04 – device error
CRC
address for function 6. see Error codes (exception codes) on page 190

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 197

DRAFT!

Nominal Power – writing

Table: Setpoints
Allowed Modbus functions: 03, 04, 06, 16
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Nominal Basic
03008 8276 kW Unsigned 2 0 1 5000
Power Settings

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 0B C0 00 64 8A 39
Register address Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec 0064hex = 100dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 0B C0 00 00 8B D2
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec

Writen setpoint nominal power is 100 kW.

CRC calculation
The check field allows the receiver to check the validity of the message. The check field value is the Cyclical
16 15 2
Redundancy Check (CRC) based on the polynomial x +x +x +1. CRC is counted from all message bytes
preceding the check field.
Online CRC calculator: http://www.lammertbies.nl/comm/info/crc-calculation.html Use CRC-16 (Modbus)
Write LSB first.
For writing nominal power 100 kW the CRC is calculated from this data: 01060BC00064hex

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 198

DRAFT!

Modbus TCP examples

Reading of Battery voltage
Export table of values from InteliConfig

Table: Values
Allowed Modbus functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Controller
01053 8213 BatteryVoltage V Integer 2 1 0 400
I/O

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 04 1D 00 01
transaction protocol Length of
Controller Modbus Register address Number of
identifier identifier data bytes
address function 041Dhex = 1053dec registers
(usually 0) (usually 0) following

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

00 00 00 00 00 05 01 03 02 00 F0
transaction protocol Length of Length of data
Controller Modbus Data
identifier identifier data bytes 02hex = 2 bytes
address function 00F0hex = 240dec
(usually 0) (usually 0) following read

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 199

DRAFT!
7 Technical data
Power supply E-Stop
Power supply range 8-36 VDC Dedicated terminal for safe E-Stop input
Physically disconnects binary outputs 1 & 2 from power supply
Power consumption
3.5 W
(without modules) Binary inputs
RTC battery Replaceable (3 V) 8, non-isolated
Number
Fusing power 5 A / 6 × 0.5 A BOUT 0-2 VDC close contact
Close/Open indication
E-Stop fusing 15 A 6-36 VDC open contact

Max. Power Dissipation 9W

Binary outputs
Operating conditions Number 8, non-isolated

Protection degree Max. current BO1,2 = 5 A; BO3-8 = 0.5 A

IP 65
(front panel) Switching to positive supply terminal
Operating temperature -20 ˚C to +70 ˚C
Analog inputs
Operating temperature
-40 ˚C to +70 ˚C
for Low Temp. version Number 4, switchable (R/U/I)

Storage temperature -30 ˚C to +80 ˚C Range R = 0-2500 Ω; U = 0-10 V; I = 0-20 mA

95 % non-condensing R: ±2 % from value ±5 Ω for 0-250 Ω
Operating humidity
(EN 60068-2-30) R: ±4 % from value for 250 Ω-2500 Ω
Accuracy
5-25 Hz, ± 1.6 mm U: 1 % from value ±100 mV
Vibration
25-100 Hz, a = 4 g I: 1 % from value ±0.2 mA
2
Shocks a = 500 m/s
Magnetic pickup
Surrounding air temperature rating 70 °C
4 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 4 Hz to 1 kHz
Suitable for pollution degree 2 Voltage input
6 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 1 to 5 kHz
range
D+ 10 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 5 to 10 kHz

Max. output current 250 mA Frequency

4 Hz to 10 kHz
Charging fail input range
Adjustable
threshold Frequency
measurement 0.2 % from range 10 kHz
Voltage measurement tolerance
Measurement inputs 3ph-n Gen voltage , 3ph-n Mains
6 back to Table of contents
277 V AC / 480 V AC (EU)
Measurement range
346 V AC / 600 V AC (US/Canada)

Accuracy 1%

Frequency range 40-70 Hz (accuracy 0.1 Hz)

Input impedance 0.72 MΩ ph-ph , 0.36 MΩ ph-n

Display
Type Build-in monochromatic 3.2"

Resolution 132 × 64 px

Communications
USB Device Non-isolated type B connector

USB Host Non-isolated type A connector

RS485 Isolated
250 / 50 kbps, nominal impedance
CAN 1
120 Ω

Current measurement
Measurement inputs 3ph Gen current

Measurement range 5A

Max. allowed current 10 A

Accuracy ±20 mA for 0-2 A; 1 % of value for 2-5 A

Input impedance <0.1 Ω

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 200

DRAFT!

8 Appendix
8.1 Controller objects 201
8.2 Alarms 570
8.3 Modules 636

6 back to Table of contents

8.1 Controller objects

8.1.1 List of controller objects types
8.1.2 Setpoints 201
8.1.3 Values 401
8.1.4 Logical binary inputs 470
8.1.5 Logical binary outputs 492
8.1.6 Logical analog inputs 541
8.1.7 PLC 551
8.1.8 Fixed Protection States 562
8.1.9 User Protection States 567

8.1.2 Setpoints
What setpoints are:
Setpoints are analog, binary or special data objects which are used for adjusting the controller to the specific
environment. Setpoints are organized into groups according to their meaning. Setpoints can be adjusted from
the controller front panel, PC, MODBUS, etc.
All setpoints can be protected by a password against unauthorized changes. Password protection can be
assigned to the setpoints during the configuration procedure. See the chapter Password (page 1) in Operator
guide for instructions on how to enter and modify a password.
IMPORTANT: Do not write setpoints repeatedly (e.g. power control from a PLC by repeated writing
of baseload setpoint via Modbus). The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory, which can be
5
overwritten up to 10 times without risk of damage or data loss, but it may become damaged, when
the allowed number of writing cycles is exceeded.

For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of setpoints (page 202).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 201

List of setpoints

Group: Basic settings 208 Main Screen Line 1 226

Subgroup: Name 208 Main Screen Line 2 226
Gen-Set Name 208 Subgroup: Phase Rotation 226
Subgroup: Power settings 208 Phase Rotation 226
Nominal Power Split Phase 208 Subgroup: HMI Settings 227
Nominal Power 209 Main Screen Line 1 227
Subgroup: Current settings 209 Main Screen Line 2 227
Nominal Current 209 Screen Filter 227
CT Ratio 210 Group: Communication Settings 228
CT Location 210 Subgroup: Controller Address 228
Subgroup: Voltage settings 211 Controller Address 228
Connection type 211 Subgroup: RS485 Settings 228
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 214 RS485 Mode 228
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 214 RS485 Communication Speed 229
Nominal Voltage 3Ph Low Y 215 RS485 Modbus Speed 229
Nominal Voltage 3Ph High Y 215 Group: Engine settings 230
Nominal Voltage High Leg D 215 Subgroup: Starting 230
Nominal Voltage SplitPhase 216 Fuel Solenoid 230
Nominal Voltage MonoPhase 216 Dual Starter Sequence 230
Gen VT Ratio 216 Cranking Attempts 231
Mains VT Ratio 217 Maximum Cranking Time 231
Subgroup: Frequency settings 217 Cranking Fail Pause 231
Nominal Frequency 217 Prestart Time 232
Gear Teeth 218 Starting RPM 232
Nominal RPM 218 Starting Oil Pressure 233
Subgroup: Controller settings 219 Glow Plugs Time 233
Controller Mode 219 Idle RPM 233
Power On Mode 219 Subgroup: Choke 234
Default Application Select 220 Choke Function 234
GCB Control Mode 220 Choke Time 234
Reset To Manual 222 Choke Start Temp 235
Backlight Timeout 222 Choke Increment 236
Horn Timeout 223 Choke Voltage 237
Zero Power Mode 223 Choke Lead 238
Run Hours Source 224 Subgroup: Starting Timers 239
Screen Filter 225 Fuel Solenoid Lead 239
Idle Time 239

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 202

Minimal Stabilization Time 241 Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2 259
Maximal Stabilization Time 242 Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 260
Run Only Block Delay 243 Maintenance Timer 1 260
Sd Ventilation Time 243 Maintenance Timer 2 260
Subgroup: Stopping 244 Maintenance Timer 3 260
Cooling Speed 244 Maintenance Timer 4 261
Subgroup: Stopping Timers 244 Maintenance Timer 5 261
Cooling Time 244 Maintenance Timer 6 262
Stop Time 244 Subgroup: Ventilation 262
After Cooling Time 246 Ventilation Pulse Time 262
Subgroup: D+ Function 246 Subgroup: ECU Settings 263
D+ Function 246 ECU Speed Adjustment 263
D+ Threshold 248 Group: Generator settings 263
D+ Delay 248 Subgroup: Overload Protection 263
D+ Alarm Type 248 Overload BOC 263
Subgroup: Engine Protections 249 Overload Wrn 264
Overspeed Sd 249 Overload Delay 264
Starting Overspeed Sd 249 Subgroup: Current Protection 264
Starting Overspeed Time 250 Short Circuit BOC 264
Starting Overspeed Protection 251 Short Circuit BOC Delay 265
Underspeed Sd 251 IDMT Overcurrent Delay 265
Subgroup: Fuel Theft Protection 252 Current Unbalance BOC 267
Fuel Tank Volume 252 Current Unbalance BOC Delay 267
Maximal Fuel Drop 252 Subgroup: Voltage Protection 268
Maximal Fuel Drop Delay 252 Generator Overvoltage Sd 268
Subgroup: Fuel Pump 253 Generator Overvoltage Wrn 268
Fuel Pump On 253 Generator Undervoltage Wrn 269
Fuel Pump Off 254 Generator Undervoltage BOC 269
Transfer Wrn Delay 255 Generator <> Voltage Delay 269
Subgroup: Temperature Switch 256 Voltage Unbalance BOC 270
Temperature Switch On 256 Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay 270
Temperature Switch Off 257 Subgroup: Frequency Protection 270
Subgroup: Battery Protections 257 Generator Overfrequency BOC 270
Battery Undervoltage 257 Generator Overfrequency Wrn 271
Battery Overvoltage 258 Generator Underfrequency Wrn 271
Battery <> Voltage Delay 258 Generator Underfrequency BOC 271
Battery Charger Fail Delay 258 Generator <> Frequency Delay 272
Subgroup: Pulse Counters 259 Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection 272
Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1 259 Reverse Power Level 272

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 203

Reverse Power Delay 272 MCB Opens On 290
Group: Protections 273 Group: Dual operation 290
Subgroup: Overload Protection 273 Subgroup: Dual Operation 290
Overload Protection 273 Running Hours Max Difference 290
Subgroup: Current Protection 273 Running Hours Base 291
IDMT Overcurrent Protection 273 Swap Gen-sets 291
Current Unbalance Protection 274 Master Error Protection 292
Subgroup: Voltage Protection 275 Slave Error Protection 292
Generator <> Voltage Protection 275 Transfer Delay 292
Voltage Unbalance Protection 276 Group: Load Shedding 293
Subgroup: Frequency Protection 277 Subgroup: Load Shedding 293
Generator Frequency Protection 277 Load Shedding Active 293
Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection 278 Load Shedding Level 293
Reverse Power Protection 278 Load Shedding Delay 294
Subgroup: Speed Protection 278 Subgroup: Load Reconnectino Settings 294
Underspeed Protection 278 Load Reconnection Level 294

Group: Mains Settings 279 Load Reconnection Delay 294

Subgroup: AMF Timers 279 Auto Load Reconnection 295
Emergency Start Delay 279 Group: User Setpoints 295
Mains Return Delay 279 Subgroup: User Setpoints 295
MCB Close Delay 280 Fuel Level BOC 295
Transfer Delay 280 Fuel Level Wrn 296
Subgroup: Mains Voltage Limits 282 Fuel Level Delay 296
Mains Overvoltage 282 Coolant Temp Low Wrn 296
Mains Undervoltage 283 Coolant Temp Low Delay 297
Mains <> Voltage Delay 283 Coolant Temp BOC 297
Mains Overvoltage Hys 284 Coolant Temp Wrn 297
Mains Undervoltage Hys 285 Coolant Temp Delay 298
Mains Voltage Unbalance 286 Oil Pressure Sd 298
Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay 286 Oil Pressure Wrn 298
Subgroup: Mains Frequency Limits 286 Oil Pressure Delay 299
Mains Overfrequency 286 Group: User Buttons 299
Mains Underfrequency 287 Subgroup: User Buttons 299

Mains Overfrequency Hys 287 User Button 1 299

Mains Underfrequency Hys 287 User Button 2 299

Mains <> Frequency Delay 288 User Button 3 300

Subgroup: AMF Settings 288 User Button 4 300

Return From Island 288 User Button 5 300

MCB Logic 288 User Button 6 301

User Button 7 301

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 204

User Button 8 301 AIN Switch05 On 318
User Button 9 302 AIN Switch05 Off 319
User Button 10 302 Subgroup: Analog Switches 6 320
User Button 11 302 AIN Switch06 On 320
User Button 12 303 AIN Switch06 Off 321
User Button 13 303 Subgroup: Analog Switches 7 322
User Button 14 303 AIN Switch07 On 322
User Button 15 304 AIN Switch07 Off 323
User Button 16 304 Subgroup: Analog Switches 8 324
User Button 17 304 AIN Switch08 On 324
User Button 18 305 AIN Switch08 Off 325
User Button 19 305 Subgroup: Analog Switches 9 326
User Button 20 305 AIN Switch09 On 326
User Button 21 306 AIN Switch09 Off 327
User Button 22 306 Subgroup: Analog Switches 10 328
User Button 23 306 AIN Switch10 On 328
User Button 24 307 AIN Switch10 Off 329
User Button 25 307 Group: Scheduler 329
User Button 26 307 Subgroup: Time & Date 329
User Button 27 308 Time 329
User Button 28 308 Date 330
User Button 29 308 Time Stamp Period 330
User Button 30 309 Summer Time Mode 331
User Button 31 309 Subgroup: Timer 1 332
User Button 32 309 Timer 1 Function 332

Group: Analog Switches 310 Timer 1 Setup 333

Subgroup: Analog Switches 1 310 Timer 1 First Occur. Date 333
AIN Switch01 On 310 Timer 1 First Occur. Time 334
AIN Switch01 Off 311 Timer 1 Duration 334
Subgroup: Analog Switches 2 312 Timer 1 Repetition 334
AIN Switch02 On 312 Timer 1 Repeated 335
AIN Switch02 Off 313 Timer 1 Repeat Day 335
Subgroup: Analog Switches 3 314 Timer 1 Day 336
AIN Switch03 On 314 Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week 336
AIN Switch03 Off 315 Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month 336
Subgroup: Analog Switches 4 316 Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month 337
AIN Switch04 On 316 Timer 1 Refresh Period 338
AIN Switch04 Off 317 Timer 1 Weekends 339
Subgroup: Analog Switches 5 318 Subgroup: Timer 2 340

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 205

Timer 2 Function 340 Fence 2 Delay 360
Timer 2 Setup 341 Group: Plug-In Modules 360
Timer 2 First Occur. Date 341 Subgroup: Slot A 360
Timer 2 First Occur. Time 341 Slot A 360
Timer 2 Duration 342 Subgroup: Slot B 361
Timer 2 Repetition 342 Slot B 361
Timer 2 Repeated 343 Group: CM-4G-GPS 361
Timer 2 Repeat Day 343 Subgroup: Cellular Interface 361

Timer 2 Day 344 Internet Connection 361

Timer 2 Repeated Day In Week 344 Network Mode 362

Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month 344 Access Point Name 362

Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month 345 Subgroup: E-mail client 362

Timer 2 Refresh Period 346 E-mail Server Type 362

Timer 2 Weekends 347 SMTP User Name 363

Subgroup: Timer 3 348 SMTP User Password 363

Timer 3 Function 348 SMTP Server Address 364

Timer 3 Setup 349 SMTP Sender Address 364

Subgroup: Timer 4 350 SMTP Encryption 365

Timer 4 Function 350 Subgroup: Remote Messages 365

Timer 4 Setup 351 Message Language 365

Subgroup: Rental Timers 351 Event Message 366

Rental Timer 1 351 Wrn Message 366

Rental Timer 1 Wrn 353 BOC Message 366

Rental Timer 2 353 Sd Messages 367

Rental Timer 2 Wrn 355 Email Address 1 367

Rental Timer BOC 355 Email Address 2 368

Group: Geo-Fencing 356 Email Address 3 368

Subgroup: Geo Fencing 356 Email Address 4 369
Geo-Fencing 356 Telephone Number 1 369
Subgroup: Position 356 Telephone Number 2 370
Home Latitude 356 Telephone Number 3 370
Home Longitude 357 Telephone Number 4 371
Subgroup: Fence 1 358 Subgroup: Position Tracking 371
Fence 1 Protection 358 GPS Tracking 371
Fence Radius 1 358 Subgroup: RTC Synchronization 372
Fence 1 Delay 359 GPS Clock Sync 372
Subgroup: Fence 2 359 Time Zone 372
Fence 2 Protection 359 Subgroup: ComAp/TCP 373
Fence Radius 2 360 AirGate Connection 373

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 206

AirGate Address 373 Nominal Current 1 385
Airgate Port 374 Connection Type 1 385
Direct Connection 374 ECU Speed Adjustment 1 388
Direct Connection Port 374 Nominal Power 1 388
ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout 375 Nominal Power Split Phase 1 389
Subgroup: IP Protocol 375 Subgroup: Configuration 2 389
IPv4 DNS Mode 375 Nominal RPM 2 389
IPv4 DNS Primary 375 Nominal Frequency 2 390
IPv4 DNS Secondary 376 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 390
IP Firewall 376 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 390
Group: CM-RS232-485 377 Nominal Current 2 391
Subgroup: COM1 Setting 377 Connection type 2 391
COM1 Mode 377 ECU Speed Adjustment 2 394
COM1 Communication Speed 377 Nominal Power 2 394
COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed 378 Nominal Power Split Phase 2 395
Subgroup: COM2 Setting 378 Subgroup: Configuration 3 395
COM2 Mode 378 Nominal RPM 3 395
COM2 Communication Speed 378 Nominal Frequency 3 396
COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed 379 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 396
Group: EM-BIO8-EFCP 379 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 396
Subgroup: EFCP Settings 379 Nominal Current 3 397
Earth Fault Current Protection 379 Connection type 3 397
Earth Fault Delay 380 ECU Speed Adjustment 3 400
Earth Fault CT Input Range 380 Nominal Power 3 400
Earth Fault CT Ratio 380 Nominal Power Split Phase 3 401
Group: CU AIN Calibration 381 6 back to Controller objects
Subgroup: Analog Input 1 381
CU AIN1 Calibration 381
Subgroup: Analog Input 2 382
CU AIN2 Calibration 382
Subgroup: Analog Input 3 382
CU AIN3 Calibration 382
Subgroup: Analog Input 4 383
CU AIN4 Calibration 383
Group: Alternate Config 383
Subgroup: Configuration 1 383
Nominal RPM 1 383
Nominal Frequency 1 384
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 384
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 384

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 207

DRAFT!

Group: Basic settings

Nominal Current
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 8275 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 211).
Description
It is current limit for mains current protections and means maximal continuous mains current. Nominal
Current can be different from mains rated current value.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Current 1 (page
385), Nominal Current 2 (page 391) and Nominal Current 3 (page 397).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 209

DRAFT!

CT Ratio
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [A/5A]
Default value 2 000 A/5A Alternative config NO
Step 1 A/5A
Comm object 8274 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Gen-set Mains import current transformers ratio.
Note: Generator Mains currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is below 1% of
CT range.

6 back to List of setpoints

CT Location
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Load / Gen-set / None [-]
Default value Gen-set Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11625 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts position of current measurement.

Load Current CT's are physically placed on Load (typically between GCB and MCB).
Gen-set Current CT's are physically placed on Gen-set (typically before GCB).
None There are no current CT's.

When option None is selected, following objects are hidden/changed:

Current screen is hidden
Generator Power screen is hidden
Statistics screens – values Gen-set kWh, Gen-set kVArh, Mains kWh and Mains kWArh are hidden
Mains screen – kW meter is replaced by generator voltage meter
Generator L1-N voltage is displayed for Monopahse, Splitphase L1L2, Splitphase L1L3 and High
Leg delta connection types
Generator L1-L2 voltage is displayed for 3ph3w and 3ph4w connection types
Group Load is hidden
Group Statistics – values Gen-set kWh, Gen-set kVArh, Mains kWh and Mains kWArh are hidden

6 back to List of setpoints

Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Connection Type 1 (page
385), Connection type 2 (page 391) and Connection type 3 (page 397).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 213

DRAFT!

Nominal Voltage Ph-N

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 8277 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 211).
Description
Nominal voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1
(page 384), Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page 390) and Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page 396).

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 11657 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 211).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1
(page 384), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page 390) and Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page 396).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 214

DRAFT!

Nominal Voltage 3Ph Low Y

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 120 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 20811 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible if one of the three Connection type (page 211) Setpoints is set to Autodetect.
Description
This setting is used as phase-neutral Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 214) by the voltage autodetect
function, if detected Connection type (page 211) is 3Ph Low Y (controller can not distinguish between the 4
wire and 3 wire connection), detected phase-phase voltage is lower than 300 V in all three phases and
phase-neutral voltage is lower than or equal to 160 V in all three phases.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage 3Ph High Y

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 277 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 20812 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible if one of the three Connection type (page 211) Setpoints is set to Autodetect.
Description
This setting is used as phase-neutral Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 214) by the voltage autodetect
function, if detected Connection type (page 211) is 3Ph High Y, detected phase-phase voltage is higher
than or equal to 300 V in all three phases and phase-neutral voltage is higher than 160 V in all three phases.

6 back to List of setpoints

Gear Teeth
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] FGen->RPM / 1 .. 500 [-]
Default value 120 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 8252 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Number of teeth on the engine flywheel where the pick-up is installed. Set to zero if no pick-up is used and
the Engine speed will be counted from the generator frequency.
Note: If no pickup is used, the D+ or W terminal should be used to prevent possible overcranking, which
can occur if at least 25% of nominal generator voltage is not present immediately after exceeding firing
speed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal RPM
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 8253 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM - revolutions per minute).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal RPM 1 (page 383),
Nominal RPM 2 (page 389) and Nominal RPM 3 (page 395).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 218

DRAFT!

Subgroup: Controller settings

Controller Mode
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST [-]
Default value OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8315 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint can be used for changing the Controller mode remotely, e.g. via Modbus. Use the mode
selector on the main screen for changing the mode from the front panel. Use mode selector in the control
window for changing the mode from InteliConfig.
6 back to List of setpoints

Power On Mode
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Previous / OFF [-]
Default value Previous Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 13000 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts controller mode after power on of controller.
Previous When controller is power on, than is switched into last mode before power off.
OFF When controller is power on, than is switched into OFF mode.

Note: Remote modes - In case that some LBI remote mode is activated during power on of controller
than this LBI has higher priority than this setpoint - controller mode is forced into mode selected via LBI.
After deactivation of LBI, controller is switched into value selected via setpoint Power On Mode

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 219

DRAFT!

Default Application Select

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] AMF / MRS [-]
Default value AMF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 12157 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Based on this setpoint is defined basic controller function.
AMF Normal AMF operation
MRS When MRS mode is selected the controller will not perform AMF functions anymore. MCB
button will be inactive and also mains measurement and protections will be disabled.
The controller will keep TEST mode and the Gen-set in AUTO mode will be able to start by
REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 489) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

GCB Control Mode

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Internal / Follow / External / No Button [-]
Default value Internal Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 11771 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 220

DRAFT!

Setpoint visibility Always

Description
Mode of Generator Circuit Breaker behavior.

The breaker is controlled only from controller. Any unexpected change of GCB
feedback causes Sd GCB fail immediately.
Incorrect reaction of the GCB feedback on internal GCB Close command causes
Sd GCB fail (within 5 s when closing to the dead bus, 2 s when synchronising).
Internal
Incorrect reaction of the GCB feedback on internal GCB Open command causes
Sd GCB fail (within 2 s).
Anytime when the controller is synchronizing via GCB the Extranal GCB closing is
being accepted in all GCB control modes.
In this mode is the external GCB opening from the external (protection) device
accepted. There is no alarm issued, only the event "GCB Opened Externally" is
recorded in history log.
Incorrect reaction of the GCB feedback on internal GCB Close command causes
Follow Sd GCB fail (within 5 s when closing to the dead bus, 2 s when synchronising).
Incorrect reaction of the GCB feedback on internal GCB Open command causes
Sd GCB fail (within 2 s).
Anytime when the controller is synchronizing via GCB the Extranal GCB closing is
being accepted in all GCB control modes.
Controller does not control the GCB at all. The GCB is controller Externally, when
the GCB feedback get changed, then the event "GCB Opened" or "GCB Closed" is
recorded in the history log.
Controller always accept the GCB feadback position, do not issue any alarm.
The Controller does not care about the GCB position even the engine is stopped or
running. Gen-set with closed GCB is not blocked against starting.
When the Sd protection shut down the engine, the GCB stays closed. The BOC
External protection do not open the GCB, controller goes to cooling when the BOC
protection was tripped (GCB stays closed until opened externally).
The controller informs the superordinated system about the status of the braker
automat using the signals
LBO FORWARD SYNCHRONISATION (PAGE 1)
LBO REVERSE SYNCHRONISATION (PAGE 1)
LBO IN SYNCHRONISM (PAGE 1)
LBO READY TO LOAD (PAGE 534)
No Button GCB button and LBI GCB button is deactivated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 221

DRAFT!

Reset To Manual
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9983 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
If this function is enabled, the controller will switch automatically to MAN mode when there is a red alarm in
the alarm list and fault reset button is pressed. This is a safety function that prevents the gen-set starting
again automatically in specific cases when fault reset button is pressed.
Example: Controller is in AUTO mode and there is red inactive unconfirmed alarm and fault reset
button is pressed, controller will start automatically.

6 back to List of setpoints

Backlight Timeout
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 255 [min]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 10121 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The display backlight is switched off when this timer exceed. When setpoint is adjusted to disabled then the
display will be backlighted all the time.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 222

DRAFT!

Horn Timeout
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 599 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8264 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Setting of horn behavior.
Disabled Disabling the Horn sounding function
Timeout for HORN (PAGE 518) binary output. The HORN (PAGE 518) output is active
1 .. 599 [s]
when this timeout elapsed.

Note: Horn timeout starts again from the beginning if a new alarm appears before previous Horn timeout
has elapsed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Zero Power Mode

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 360 [min]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 8548 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
The controller is switched to Zero Power Mode when there is no user interaction with the controller for the
preset time period. Zero Power Mode is disabled in AMF automatic mode. For the controller wake up press
button Start or activate Binary Input 1. The controller will not switch to Zero Power Mode if generator is
running. In Zero Power Mode binary outputs go to high impedance
Note: Power consumption of controller in Zero Power Mode is 0 mA. Controller is internally
disconnected from power supply.

Note: While there is USB power present (USB cable plagued) the controller is able to turn off when there
is no user interaction but wake up is not possible. USB power has to be cut off (USB cable unplagued).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 223

DRAFT!

Run Hours Source

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] AUTO / ECU / INTERNAL [-]
Default value AUTO Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 13345 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint selects source of running hours.
AUTO If there is some ECU which send valid running hours, then this value is used.
Otherwise value from internal counter is used.
ECU Running hours are taken from ECU if ECU send valid data. It is not possible to set
and reset this value in statistics.
INTERNAL Running hours are taken from internal counter. It is possible to set and reset this value
in statistics.

Note: It is not necessary to restart controller when this setpoint is changed. Change of this setpoint
should be applied immediately.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 224

DRAFT!

Screen Filter
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Enable/Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15889 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables/disables filter values on CU screen.
List of values which are filtered when filter is ON.
Generator Voltage L1-L2
Generator Voltage L2-L3
Generator Voltage L3-L1
Generator Voltage L1-N
Generator Voltage L2-N
Generator Voltage L3-N
Generator Frequency
Load kVA
Load kVA L1
Load kVA L2
Load kVA L3
Load kVAr
Load kVAr L1
Load kVAr L2
Load kVAr L3
Load kW
Load kW L1
Load kW L2
Load kW L3

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 225

DRAFT!

Main Screen Line 1

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] RPM / PF / Run Hours / ATT / AIN1 [-]
Default value PF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 13346 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Description
This setpoint adjusts line 1 on Mains screen.

6 back to List of setpoints

Main Screen Line 2

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] RPM / PF / Run Hours / ATT / AIN1 [-]
Default value RPM Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14628 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Description
This setpoint adjusts line 2 on Mains screen.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Phase Rotation

Phase Rotation
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Clockwise / CounterCCW [-]
Default value Clockwise Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15122 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility All the time
Description
This setpoint adjust the phase sequence of voltage terminals.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 226

DRAFT!

Subgroup: HMI Settings

Main Screen Line 1

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] RPM/PF/Run Hours/ATT/AIN1 [-]
Default value PF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 13346 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts line 1 on Mains screen.
6 back to List of setpoints

Main Screen Line 2

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] RPM/PF/Run Hours/ATT/AIN1 [-]
Default value RPM Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14628 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts line 2 on Mains screen.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 227

DRAFT!

Group: Communication Settings

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 229

DRAFT!

Group: Engine settings

Subgroup: Starting

Subgroup: Choke

DRAFT!

Subgroup: Starting Timers

Fuel Solenoid Lead

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 25,0 [s]
Default value 0,5 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 10525 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay between FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 509) and STARTER 1 (PAGE 536) logical binary outputs.FUEL
SOLENOID (PAGE 509) is active before STARTER 1 (PAGE 536). Lead time is adjusted via this setpoint.

Image 8.2 Fuel Solenoid Lead

Note: LBO PRESTART (PAGE 531) goes to logical zero when Fuel Solenoid Lead goes to logical one.

Note: This setpoint is used only for diesel Fuel Solenoid (page 230)

6 back to List of setpoints

Idle Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 12 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9097 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 239

DRAFT!

Setpoint visibility Always

Description
Idle Time delay starts when RPM exceeds Starting RPM (page 232). Start fail is detected when during Idle
state RPM decreases below 2 RPM.
The output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 519) remains inactive during the idle period. Binary output Idle/Nominal
opens during Cooling period again. This output can be used for switching the governor between idle and
nominal speed.
Note: When controller is in the MAN mode, it is possible to finish the Idle Time count down by pushing
the Start button.

Image 8.3 Idle Time 1

6 back to List of setpoints

Sd Ventilation Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 60 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9695 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
In case Fuel Solenoid (page 230) is set to GAS, the Sd Ventilation Time adjusts the time of the starter to
be switched on for engine pre-ventilation in the case of a first start attempt after shutdown or controller
switch-on.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 243

DRAFT!

Subgroup: Stopping

Cooling Speed
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Idle / Nominal [-]
Default value Nominal Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10046 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Selects the function of the binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 519) during engine cooling state.
Idle Cooling is executed at Idle speed and generator protections are switched off.
Nominal Cooling is executed at Nominal speed and generator protections are active.

Note: When ECU is connected the predefined value 900 RPM for Idle speed is requested.

Note: Binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 519) must be configured and connected to speed governor.
Engine Idle speed must be adjusted on speed governor.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Stopping Timers

Cooling Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Default value 30 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8258 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Runtime of the unloaded gen-set to cool the engine before stop.

6 back to List of setpoints

Stop Time
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 60 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9815 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 244

DRAFT!

Setpoint visibility Always

Description
Under normal conditions the engine must certainly stop within this period after the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
509) has been de-energized and the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 537) energized. The Stop Solenoid output is
deactivated 12 s after last running engine indication went off.

Image 8.7 Stop Time 1

Image 8.8 Stop Time 2

D+ Threshold
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0..100 [%]
Default value 80 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 14959 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if setpoint D+ Function (page 246) is not set to Disabled value.
Description
This setpoint adjusts threshold level for D+ Function (page 246).
6 back to List of setpoints

Starting Overspeed Protection

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] OverSpd Sd / NextStartAt [-]
Default value OverSpd Sd Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15808 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The setpoint allows user to chose which kind of protection will be triggered if speed limit is reached during
Starting Overspeed Time (page 250).
Sd overspeed option will result in controller shutting down the engine and displaying Sd Starting Overspeed
alarm and NextStartAt option will result in controller stopping the engine and trying to start again. The
number of attempts is defined by Cranking Attempts (page 231).

6 back to List of setpoints

Underspeed Sd
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. Overspeed Sd (page 249) [%]
Default value 25% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 218)
Comm object 8260 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for underspeed protection. Relative to the nominal speed.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 251

DRAFT!

Subgroup: Fuel Theft Protection

Transfer Wrn Delay

Battery Overvoltage
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Battery Undervoltage (page 257) .. 40,0 [V]
Default value 36,0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V
Comm object 9587 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning threshold for high battery voltage.
6 back to List of setpoints

Battery <> Voltage Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
DefaultFixed
5s Alternative config NO
value
Step 1s
Comm object 8383 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Battery Undervoltage (page 257) and Battery Overvoltage (page 258) protection.
IMPORTANT: This is a fixed parameter, it isn't possible to adjust it in any manner. This
parameter isn't visible either in controller or in PC tools.

6 back to List of setpoints

Battery Charger Fail Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 15 [min]
Default value 5 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 11374 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned with LBI BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 475)
Description
Delay for LBI BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 475).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 258

DRAFT!

Subgroup: Pulse Counters

Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 ... 1 000 [-]
Default value 1 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 10994 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if LBI PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE 486) is configured
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate of increasing of the Pulse Counter 1 function. The module counts pulses at the
input PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE 486) and if the input pulses counter reaches value given by this setpoint, the
counter value Pulse Counter 1 (page 425) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0. Both
counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.
6 back to List of setpoints

Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 ... 1 000 [-]
Default value 1 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 10995 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if LBI PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE 486) is configured
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate of increasing of the Pulse Counter 2 function. The module counts pulses at the
input PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE 486) and if the input pulses counter reaches value given by this setpoint, the
counter value Pulse Counter 2 (page 425) is increased by 0,1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0. Both
counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 259

DRAFT!

Subgroup: Maintenance Timer

Maintenance Timer 1
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] -10 000 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value 1 000 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 11616 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer 1 counts down when engine is running. If reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the timer
still counting down into negative values. When the value 10000 is set, than the Maintenance function is
disabled and counter does not count. Counter value disappear from controllers statistics.
6 back to List of setpoints

Maintenance Timer 2
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] -10 000 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value 1 000 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 11617 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer 2 counts down when engine is running. If reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the timer
still counting down into negative values. When the value 10000 is set, than the Maintenance function is
disabled and counter does not count. Counter value disappear from controllers statistics.
6 back to List of setpoints

Maintenance Timer 3
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] -10 000 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value 1 000 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 11618 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer 3 counts down when engine is running. If reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the timer
still counting down into negative values. When the value 10000 is set, than the Maintenance function is
disabled and counter does not count. Counter value disappear from controllers statistics.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 260

DRAFT!

Maintenance Timer 4
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2015 Alternative config NO
Step 1 day
Comm object 16384 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This maintenance timer is based on date. At the midnight of the last day the alarm Wrn Maintenance 4
(page 608) appears in alarmlist.
IMPORTANT: To disable this maintenance timer, set date to 01/01/2015.

6 back to List of setpoints

Maintenance Timer 5
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2015 Alternative config NO
Step 1 day
Comm object 16385 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This maintenance timer is based on date. At the midnight of the last day the alarm Wrn Maintenance 5
(page 608) appears in alarmlist.
IMPORTANT: To disable this maintenance timer, set date to 01/01/2015.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 261

DRAFT!

Maintenance Timer 6
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2015 Alternative config NO
Step 1 day
Comm object 16386 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This maintenance timer is based on date. At the midnight of the last day the alarm Wrn Maintenance 6
(page 609) appears in alarmlist.
IMPORTANT: To disable this maintenance timer, set date to 01/01/2015.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Ventilation

Ventilation Pulse Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0–3600 [s]
Default value 30 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 15767 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Only when logical binary output VENTILATION ON PULSE (PAGE 540) or VENTILATION
Setpoint visibility
OFF PULSE (PAGE 540) is configured.
Description
This setpoint defines duration of pulse generated on logical binary outputs VENTILATION ON PULSE (PAGE
540) or VENTILATION OFF PULSE (PAGE 540) at the moment when logical binary output VENTILATION (PAGE
539) is activated or deactivated respectively.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 262

DRAFT!

Subgroup: ECU Settings

ECU Speed Adjustment

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 9948 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50 %. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment 1
(page 388), ECU Speed Adjustment 2 (page 394) and ECU Speed Adjustment 3 (page 400).

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Generator settings

Subgroup: Overload Protection

Overload BOC
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Overload Wrn (page 264) .. 200 [%]
Default value 120 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Power (page 209)
Comm object 8280 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold level for generator overload (in % of Nominal power) protection. Protection is BOC (Breaker Open
and Gen-set Cooldown).
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 263

DRAFT!

Overload Wrn
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. Overload BOC (page 263) [%]
Default value 120 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Power (page 209)
Comm object 9685 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold level for generator overload (in % of Nominal power) protection. This is only warning.
6 back to List of setpoints

Overload Delay
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 5,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8281 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Overload BOC (page 263)Overload BOC (page 263) and Overload Wrn (page 264) protection.
6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Current Protection

Short Circuit BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 100 .. 500 [%]
Default value 250 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 209)
Comm object 8282 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
BOC occurs when generator current reaches this preset threshold.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 264

DRAFT!

Short Circuit BOC Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0,00 .. 10,00 [s]
Default value 0,04 s Alternative config YES
Step 0,01 s
Comm object 9991 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Short Circuit BOC (page 264) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

IDMT Overcurrent Delay

Generator
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
settingsMains Settings
Range [units] 1.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 4.0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8283 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 265

DRAFT!

Setpoint visibility Always

Description
IDMT curve shape selection. IDMT Overcurrent Delay is a reaction time of IDMT protection for 200%
overcurrent Igen =2*Nominal Current (page 209)
IDMT is "very inverse" over current protection. Reaction time is not constant but depends on over current
level according to the following formula:

Note: Reaction time is limited to 3600 s = 60 minutes. IDMT protection is not active for Reaction time
values longer than 60 minutes.

Igen is maximal value of all measured phases of generator Mains current.

Table 8.1 EXAMPLE of Reaction time for different over current levels
Overcurrent
Overcurrent IDMT Delay
≤ 100 % 101 % 110 %
0.2 s No action 20 s 2s
Reaction time 2s No action 200 s 20 s
20 s No action 2000 s 200 s

Image 8.17 IDMT Overcurrent Delay

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 266

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 269) [%]
Default value 70 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 214) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 214)
Comm object 8293 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator undervoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is used.
Note: Phase to phase and phase to neutral voltages are used for this protection.

Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator <> Voltage Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 3,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 9103 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 268), Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 268), Generator
Undervoltage BOC (page 269) and Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 269) protection.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 269

DRAFT!

Voltage Unbalance BOC

Generator settingsBus
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Settings
Range [units] 1 .. 200 [%] of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 214)
Default value 10 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 214)
Comm object 8288 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 211)
Description
Threshold for generator voltage unbalance alarm.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay

Generator settingsBus
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Settings
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 3,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8289 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 211)
Description
Delay for Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 270) protection.
6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Frequency Protection

Generator Overfrequency BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 271) .. 200,0 [%]
Default value 110,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 217)
Comm object 8296 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 270

DRAFT!

Generator Overfrequency Wrn

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 271) .. Generator Overfrequency BOC
Range [units]
(page 270) [%]
Default value 110,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 217)
Comm object 9688 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.
6 back to List of setpoints

Generator Underfrequency Wrn

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 271) .. Generator Overfrequency Wrn
Range [units]
(page 271) [%]
Default value 85,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 217)
Comm object 9689 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.
6 back to List of setpoints

Generator Underfrequency BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 271) [%]
Default value 85,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 217)
Comm object 8298 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 271

DRAFT!

Generator <> Frequency Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 3,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8297 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 270), Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 271),
Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 271) and Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 271)
protection.
6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection

Reverse Power Level

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 50 [%]
Default value 10 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 217)
Comm object 8486 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Reverse Power Protection (page 278).
Description
Level for generator Reverse Power Protection (page 278).

6 back to List of setpoints

Reverse Power Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 5,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8552 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Reverse Power Protection (page 278).
Description
Delay for generator Reverse Power Protection (page 278).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 272

DRAFT!

Group: Protections

Subgroup: Overload Protection

Overload Protection
Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Enabled/Disabled/By LBIExtDisable [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15664 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Overload protection.

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Overload BOC

Enabled:
(page 263), Overload Wrn (page 264) and Overload Delay (page 264).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
By LBI: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION ENABLE (PAGE 1).
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI FORCE PROTECTION DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 479)

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Current Protection

IDMT Overcurrent Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / By LBIExtDisable[-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15666 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator IDMT Overcurrent protection.

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoint IDMT

Enabled:
Overcurrent Delay (page 265).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
By LBI: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION ENABLE (PAGE 1).
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI FORCE PROTECTION DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 479)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 273

DRAFT!

Current Unbalance Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / By LBIExtDisable[-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15667 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Current Unbalance protection.

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Current

Enabled:
Unbalance BOC (page 267) and Current Unbalance BOC Delay (page 267).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
By LBI: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION ENABLE (PAGE 1).
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI FORCE PROTECTION DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 479)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 274

DRAFT!

Subgroup: Voltage Protection

Generator <> Voltage Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / By LBIExtDisable [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15668 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Generator <> Voltage protection. GCB closing is blocked, if
the protection is disabled!

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Generator

Overvoltage Sd (page 268), Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 268), Generator
Enabled:
Undervoltage BOC (page 269), Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 269) and
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
By LBI: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION ENABLE (PAGE 1).
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI FORCE PROTECTION DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 479)
GCB closing, generator voltage regulation and synchronization are disabled (blocked), if the parameter is set
to Disabled. It is blocked as well, if the parameter is set to ExtDisable and LB IFORCE PROTECTION DISABLE
(PAGE 479) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 275

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoint Underspeed Sd

Enabled:
(page 251).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
By LBI: Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION ENABLE (PAGE 1).
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI FORCE PROTECTION DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 479)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 278

DRAFT!

Group: Mains Settings

Subgroup: AMF Timers

Emergency Start Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 6 000 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8301 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Delay after the mains failure to the start command of the Gen-set.

Image 8.18 Emergency Start Delay

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Return Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 3 600 [s]
Default value 20 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8302 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
This setpoint adjust the delay, how long mains has to be returned after mains fail to start load transfer to
mains.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 279

DRAFT!

MCB Close Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 1.0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8389 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Delay after mains returns to MCB closing, if the Gen-set is not running (e.g. is in start-up procedure).
IMPORTANT: This is a fixed parameter, it isn't possible to adjust it in any manner. This
parameter isn't visible either in controller or in PC tools.

6 back to List of setpoints

Transfer Delay
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 1.0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8303 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 280

DRAFT!

Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Delay used in dual operation function. This delay is used when load from first Gen-set is transferred to
second Gen-set. Delay starts to countdown when GCB of first Gen-set is open. When this delay countdown,
GCB of second Gen-set is closed. This delay is important for correct function of external interlock.
Delay after GCB opening to MCB closing during the return procedure. Delay after MCB opening to GCB
closing if the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 290) is set to GENRUN.
The time charts bellow show recommended setting of Transfer Delay setpoint.
If the Transfer Delay setpoint is set shorter than the time required for opening of the circuit breaker, the
controller closes GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 511) output straight away (100 ms) after the MCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 484) input deactivates.

Image 8.19 Transfer Delay 1

Mains Overvoltage Hys

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 100 .. Mains Overvoltage (page 282) [%]
Default value 105 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Threshold defines the level of turning off Mains overvoltage protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 284

DRAFT!

Mains Undervoltage Hys

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Mains Undervoltage (page 283) .. 100 [%]
Default value 65 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Threshold defines the level of turning off Mains undervoltage protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 285

DRAFT!

Mains Voltage Unbalance

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 150 [%] of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 214)
Default value 10 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 214)
Comm object 8446 Related applications AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Threshold for Mains voltage unbalance.
6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 2.0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8447 Related applications AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Delay for Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 286) protection.
6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Mains Frequency Limits

Mains Overfrequency
Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Mains Underfrequency (page 287) .. 150 [%]
Default value 102.0 % Alternative config NO
Step 1.0 % of Nominal Frequency (page 217)
Comm object 8310 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Threshold for Mains overfrequency.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 286

DRAFT!

Mains Underfrequency
Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 50 .. Mains Overfrequency (page 286) [%]
Default value 98.0 % Alternative config NO
Step 1.0 % of Nominal Frequency (page 217)
Comm object 8312 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Threshold for Mains underfrequency.
6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Overfrequency Hys

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 100 .. Mains Overfrequency (page 286) [%]
Default value 102.0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 %
Comm object Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Threshold defines the level of turning off Mains overfrequency protection..
6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Underfrequency Hys

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Mains Underfrequency (page 287) .. 100 [%]
Default value 98.0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 %
Comm object Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Threshold defines the level of turning off Mains underfrequency protection..
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 287

DRAFT!

Mains <> Frequency Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 0.5 s Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8311 Related applications AMF
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Delay for Mains Underfrequency (page 287)Mains Underfrequency (page 1) and Mains Overfrequency
(page 286)Mains Overfrequency (page 1) protection.
6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: AMF Settings

Return From Island

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Manual / Auto [-]
DefaultFixed
Auto Alternative config NO
value
Step [-]
Comm object 9590 Related applications AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Setpoint adjust the behavior of closing MCB when the mains returns.

Controller remains in AUT mode and the manual return to Mains is done via MCB
button. Manual Restore (page 599) message is displayed in alarmlist to notify
Manual operator – it will disappear automatically after MCB close button is pushed.
Note: Select MANUAL in case you need to manually control the moment
when the load is transferred back to the mains.
Auto No automatic mode change is performed.

IMPORTANT: This is a fixed parameter, it isn't possible to adjust it in any manner. This
parameter isn't visible either in controller or in PC tools.

6 back to List of setpoints

MCB Logic
Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Close On / Close Off [-]
Default value Close Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 288

DRAFT!

Comm object 8444 Related applications AMF

Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
The setpoint influences the behavior of the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 523).
Close On When the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 523) is active – MCB should be closed.
Close Off When the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 523) is active – MCB should be opened.

Image 8.21 MCB Logic 1

Image 8.22 MCB Logic 2

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 289

DRAFT!

MCB Opens On
Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Mains Fail / Gen Run [-]
Default value Gen Run Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9850 Related applications AMF
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Default Application Select (page 220)
Description
Setpoint adjust the behavior of opening MCB in AUTO mode when there is mains fail.

Mains The command to open the MCB is given immediately after mains fail condition is
Fail evaluated.
If the mains will return into parameters after MCB was opened and before GCB is closed,
timer MCB Close Delay (page 280) is applied before MCB closing.
Gen Run MCB will be opened when engine will be running and it will be possible to transfer load
from Mains to gen-set (after stabilization phase).

Note: This option should be used for MCBs using 230V control and not equipped with the undervoltage
coil.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Dual operation

Subgroup: Dual Operation

Running Hours Max Difference

Setpoint group Dual operation Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0,1 .. 1000,0 [h]
Default value 10 h Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 h
Comm object 16039 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
377) and COM2 Mode (page 378)
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximal allowed difference of dual operation running hours between Master and
Slave. When difference is higher, swap of load between controllers should be done.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 290

DRAFT!

Running Hours Base

Setpoint group Dual operation Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] -10 000,0 .. 10 000,0 [h]
Default value 0h Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 h
Comm object 16040 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
377) and COM2 Mode (page 378)
Description
This setpoint modifies the running hours of controller used in dual operation function. Negative value is
decrement from running hours, positive value is increment to running hours.
Example:
Master controller has 1000 h.
Slave controller has 100 h.
Adjust setpoint of slave controller to 900 h to have both controllers on "0" running hours in dual
operation.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Load Shedding

Subgroup: Load Shedding

Load Shedding Active

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disabled / Gen only / All the time [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11001 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for adjustment when the load shedding function is active.

Disabled The Load shedding function is disabled. All the outputs are open.
Gen only The function is active when Breaker State (page 428) = IsOper.
Load shedding outputs are activated / deactivated one by one in island
operation
All Loadshedding outputs are tripped once the Gen-set comes into the island
operation from "NO LOAD" operation (MCB and (M)GCB were opened ->
Gen-set started and (M)GCB closed).
All the time Load shedding Outputs are controlled by the load shedding function regardless of
breaker positions.
Loadshedding is active in island operation, in parallel operation too.
All Loadshedding outputs are never tripped at once.

6 back to List of setpoints

Load Shedding Level

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Load Reconnection Level .. 200 [%] of Nominal RPM (page 218)
Default value 80 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 8884 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Load Shedding Active (page 293) is enabled
Description
This setpoint is used to activates the next Load shedding stage.When Gen-set load exceeds this level for
more than Load Shedding Delay (page 294) time

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 293

DRAFT!

Load Shedding Delay

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0,0..600,0 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8887 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Load Shedding Active (page 293) is enabled
Description
This setpoint is used to proceeds the next Load shedding stage.When Gen-set load exceeds this level for
more than Load Shedding Level (page 293) time

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Load Reconnectino Settings

Load Reconnection Level

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. Load Shedding Level (page 293) [%]
Default value 20 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 8890 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Load Shedding Active (page 293) is enabled
Description
This setpoint is used to proceeds the next Load shedding stage.When Gen-set load exceeds this level for
more than Load Shedding Delay (page 294) time

6 back to List of setpoints

Load Reconnection Delay

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0..600 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8893 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Load Shedding Active (page 293) is enabled
Description
This setpoint is used to proceeds the lower Load shedding stage. When Gen-set load drops under Load
Reconnection Level (page 294) for more than this delay time, the binary output for higher stage is opened.
Automatic load reconnection works only when Load Reconnection Delay = Enabled

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 294

DRAFT!

Auto Load Reconnection

Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9649 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Load Shedding Active (page 293) is enabled
Description
Switch between manual and automatic reconnection of shedded load..

Setpoint group User Setpoints Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [°C]
Default value Alternative config NO
Step
Comm object 65530 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
.

6 back to List of setpoints

Coolant Temp Wrn

Setpoint group User Setpoints Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [°C]
Default value Alternative config NO
Step
Comm object 65531 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 297

DRAFT!

Coolant Temp Delay

Setpoint group User Setpoints Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [s]
Default value Alternative config NO
Step
Comm object 65532 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
.

6 back to List of setpoints

Oil Pressure Sd
Setpoint group User Setpoints Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [bar]
Default value Alternative config NO
Step
Comm object 65533 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
.

6 back to List of setpoints

Oil Pressure Wrn

Setpoint group User Setpoints Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [bar]
Default value Alternative config NO
Step
Comm object 65534 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 298

DRAFT!

Oil Pressure Delay

Setpoint group User Setpoints Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [s]
Default value Alternative config NO
Step
Comm object 65535 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
.

6 back to List of setpoints

AIN Switch10 Off

Setpoint group Analog Switches Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] the range is defined by an analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
an analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by an analog sensor curve
Comm object 14984 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output AIN SWITCH10 (PAGE 498) is configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH10 (PAGE 498) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 544) analog input.

Image 8.42 General analog input 10 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Scheduler

Subgroup: Time & Date

Time
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] HH:MM:SS [-]
Default value 0:0:0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24554 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Real time clock adjustment.
Note: RTC has no backup battery. This setpoint needs to be set-up after connection of +/- terminal.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 329

DRAFT!

Date
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] DD/MM/YYYY [-]
Default value 1.1.2015 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24553 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Actual date adjustment.
Note: RTC has no backup battery. This setpoint needs to be set-up after connection of +/- terminal.

6 back to List of setpoints

Time Stamp Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 240 [min]
Default value 60 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 8979 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Time interval for periodic history records.
Note: History record is made only when engine is running.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 330

DRAFT!

Summer Time Mode

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disabled / Winter / Summer / Winter - S / Summer - S [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8727 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Behavior of switching between winter and summer time.

Disable Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is disabled.

Winter Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is enabled and it is set to
(Summer) winter (summer) season.
Winter - S
Modification for southern hemisphere.
(Summer - S)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 331

DRAFT!

Subgroup: Timer 1

Timer 1 Function
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disable / No Func / TEST / Test OnLd / MFail Blk / /Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15358 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is possible to choose from following timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 1 (PAGE 508) is
always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions require controller
running in AUTO mode.
Timer 1 has higher priority over Timer 2. So if Timer 1 Function (page 332) is configured for OFF mode and
Timer 2 Function (page 340) is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in OFF
mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already running.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Auto Run When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 489) binary input.
TEST When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the binary input Remote TEST.
TEST OnLd When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the Remote TEST On Load binary input.
MFail Blk When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the Mains Fail Block binary input.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the Remote OFF binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 332

DRAFT!

Timer 1 Setup
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10969 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Related setpoints for timer 1 are:
Timer 1 Function (page 332) Timer 1 Day (page 336)
Timer 1 Repetition (page 334) Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 336)
Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 333) Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 336)
Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 334) Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 337)
Timer 1 Duration (page 334) Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 338)
Timer 1 Repeated (page 335) Timer 1 Weekends (page 339)
Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 335)

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 332)
Description
Date of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 332).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 333

DRAFT!

Timer 1 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 332)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 332).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Duration
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 332)
Description
Timer 1 Function (page 332) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Repetition
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 332)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 1 Function (page 332).

Off Timer 1 Function (page 332) will not be activated.

Once Timer 1 Function (page 332) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 1 Function (page 332) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 334

DRAFT!

Timer 1 Repeated
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 332)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 1 Function (page 332).

Daily Timer 1 Function (page 332) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 1 Function (page 332) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 1 Function (page 332) is repeated in chosen day every month or in chosen
days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 1 Function (page 332) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 332)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 1 Function (page 332).

Chose one day in month when Timer 1 Function (page 332) will be
Repeated Day
activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 1 Function (page 332) will be
Repeated Day In Week
activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 335

DRAFT!

Timer 1 Day
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 332)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down buttons.
To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 332)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 332)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 1 Function (page 332) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 336

DRAFT!

Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 332)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 1 Function (page 332) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 337

DRAFT!

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 340)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 2 Function (page 340).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 340)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 340).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 341

DRAFT!

Timer 2 Duration
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 340)
Description
Timer 2 Function (page 340) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Repetition
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 340)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 2 Function (page 340).

Off Timer 2 Function (page 340) will not be activated.

Once Timer 2 Function (page 340) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 2 Function (page 340) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 342

DRAFT!

Timer 2 Repeated
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 340)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 2 Function (page 340).

Daily Timer 2 Function (page 340) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 2 Function (page 340) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 2 Function (page 340) is repeated in chosen day every month or in chosen
days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 2 Function (page 340) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 340)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 2 Function (page 340).

Chose one day in month when Timer 2 Function (page 340) will be
Repeated Day
activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 2 Function (page 340) will be
Repeated Day In Week
activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 343

DRAFT!

Timer 2 Day
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 340)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down buttons.
To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 340)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 340)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 2 Function (page 340) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 344

DRAFT!

Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 340)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 2 Function (page 340) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 345

DRAFT!

Rental Timer 1
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 8 760 [h]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 14326 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 351

DRAFT!

Setpoint visibility Always

Description
Another engine start is not allowed when this timer elapsed. This timer is based on engine running hours. The
alarm AHI Rental Timer 1 Elapsed (page 604) will be recorded in alarm list and the binary output AL
RENTAL TIMER 1 (PAGE 1) will be activated.
IMPORTANT: To reset Rental Timer 1 (page 351) we have to set up Rental Timer 1 (page 351)
again. It means go to setpoint group Scheduler and to the setpoint Rental Timer 1 (page 351).
Then press enter button , change the value if it is necessary and press enter button
again.

When the Rental Timer 1 (page 351) elapsed during engine run the Gen-set will not stop immediately. The
adjustable Rental Timer BOC (page 355) timer will start in this moment. The engine will be cooled and
stopped when the Rental Timer BOC (page 355) time elapsed.

Image 8.43 Rental Timer 1

The Running Hours Overrun counter will start increment when the engine is continue running after the Rental
Timer 1 (page 351) elapsed.
Note: There is no priority between Rental Timer 1 and Rental Timer 2. The sooner timer will activated the
Rental Timer BOC (page 355) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 352

DRAFT!

Rental Timer 1 Wrn

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disabled / 1.. Rental Timer 1 (page 351) [h]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 14332 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Rental Timer 1 (page 351)
Description
Alarm Wrn Rental Timer 1 (page 600) comes up after xx running hours from adjusting the Rental Timer 1
(page 351). Hours are adjusted by this setpoint.

Image 8.44 Rental Timer 1 Wrn

6 back to List of setpoints

Rental Timer 2
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2015 Alternative config NO
Step 1 day
Comm object 14367 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 353

DRAFT!

Setpoint visibility Always

Description
Another engine start is not allowed when this timer elapsed. This timer is based on date. At the midnight of
the last day the alarm AHI Rental Timer 1 Elapsed (page 604) will be recorded in alarm list and the binary
output AL RENTAL TIMER 2 (PAGE 1) will be activated.
IMPORTANT: To reset Rental Timer 2 (page 353) we have to set up Rental Timer 2 (page 353)
again. It means go to setpoint group Scheduler and to the setpoint Rental Timer 2 (page 353).
Then press enter button , change the value if it is necessary and press enter button
again.

IMPORTANT: To disable Rental Timer 2 (page 353) set date to 01/01/2015.

When the Rental Timer 2 (page 353) elapsed during engine run the Gen-set will not stop immediately. The
adjustable Rental Timer BOC (page 355) timer will start in this moment. The engine will be cooled and
stopped when the Rental Timer BOC (page 355) time elapsed.

Image 8.45 Rental Timer 2

Home Latitude
Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] -90,0000..90,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0001 °
Comm object 14606 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjust latitude of "home" position. Home is position where gen-set should runs. Positions on
north hemisphere have positive value, position on south hemisphere have negative value.
Note: This value with Home Longitude (page 357) are used for counting Fence Radius 1 (page 358)
and Fence Radius 2 (page 360).

Note: This value can be also obtained automatically via logical binary input GEO HOME POSITION (PAGE
481). In case of activation of this binary input for at least 2 seconds, setpoint will be adjusted
automatically from actual coordinates from GPS signal.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 356

DRAFT!

Home Longitude
Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] -180,0000..180,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0001 °
Comm object 14607 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjust longitude of "home" position. Home is position where gen-set should runs. Positions on
east hemisphere have positive value, position on west hemisphere have negative value.
Note: This value with Home Latitude (page 356) are used for counting Fence Radius 1 (page 358)
and Fence Radius 2 (page 360).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 357

DRAFT!

Subgroup: Fence 1

Fence 1 Protection
Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] HistRecOnl / Wrn / Sd / BOC[-]
Default value HistRecOnl Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14610 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Protection type for geo-fencing 1 protection. Fence of circle area is adjusted by setpoint Fence Radius 1
(page 358). Delay for protection is adjusted by setpoint Fence 1 Delay (page 359).

Protection types
HistRecOnl Position of gen-set is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used
for protection. History record is made if position is out of Fence Radius 1 (page 358).
Wrn Position of gen-set is used for warning protection only. Protection is activated when
position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 1 (page 358).
Sd Position of gen-set is used for shutdown protection. Protection is activated when
position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 1 (page 358).
BOC Position of gen-set is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection. Protection
is activated when position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 1 (page 358).

Note: Protection is activated also when GPS signal is lost for Fence 1 Delay (page 359).

6 back to List of setpoints

Fence Radius 1
Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0,0..99,9 [km]
Default value 0,0 km Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 km
Comm object 11677 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Radius for circle area 1. When the Gen-set leaves this area, Fence 1 Protection (page 358) is activated
after Fence 1 Delay (page 359).
Note: The center of this circle area is defined by "Home" position – setpoints Home Longitude (page
357) and Home Latitude (page 356).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 358

DRAFT!

Fence 1 Delay
Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0..3600 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 11682 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Delay for Fence 1 Protection (page 358).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Fence 2

Fence 2 Protection
Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] HistRecOnl / Wrn / Sd / BOC[-]
Default value HistRecOnl Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14611 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Protection type for geo-fencing 2 protection. Fence of circle area is adjusted by setpoint Fence Radius 2
(page 360). Delay for protection is adjusted by setpoint Fence 2 Delay (page 360).

Protection types
HistRecOnl Position of gen-set is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used
for protection. History record is made if position is out of Fence Radius 2 (page 360).
Wrn Position of gen-set is used for warning protection only. Protection is activated when
position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 2 (page 360).
Sd Position of gen-set is used for shutdown protection. Protection is activated when
position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 2 (page 360).
BOC Position of gen-set is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection. Protection
is activated when position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 2 (page 360).

Note: Protection is activated also when GPS signal is lost for Fence 2 Delay (page 360).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 359

DRAFT!

Fence Radius 2
Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0,0..99,9 [km]
Default value 0,0 km Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 km
Comm object 14608 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Radius for circle area 2. When the gen-set leaves this area, Fence 2 Protection (page 359) is activated
after Fence 2 Delay (page 360).
Note: The center of this circle area is defined by "Home" position - setpoints Home Longitude (page
357) and Home Latitude (page 356).

6 back to List of setpoints

Fence 2 Delay
Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0..3600 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14609 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Delay for Fence 2 Protection (page 359).

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Plug-In Modules

Subgroup: Slot A

Slot A
Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24280 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot A.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 360

DRAFT!

Subgroup: Slot B

Slot B
Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24279 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot B.
6 back to List of setpoints

Group: CM-4G-GPS

Subgroup: Cellular Interface

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 362

DRAFT!

SMTP User Name

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24313 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet Connection
Setpoint visibility
(page 361)
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP User Password

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0..15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24312 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet Connection
Setpoint visibility
(page 361)
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 363

DRAFT!

SMTP Server Address

Event Message
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10926 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 373

DRAFT!

Airgate Port
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 54440 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
ConnectionMode (page 1)
Description
.

6 back to List of setpoints

Direct Connection
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24099 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this to enable/disable direct connection of a ComAp client (e.g. InteliConfig) to the IP address of the
controller.
Note: For Direct connection the controller IP address must be reachable from the client IP address.

6 back to List of setpoints

Direct Connection Port

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 23 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24374 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This port is used to listen for an incoming TCP connection if Direct Connection is ENABLED.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 374

DRAFT!

ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [-]
Default value 60 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
ConnectionMode (page 1)
Description
.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: IP Protocol

IPv4 DNS Mode

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Automatic / Manual [-]
Default value Automatic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
ConnectionMode (page 1)
Description
.

6 back to List of setpoints

IPv4 DNS Primary

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [-]
Default value 8.8.8.8 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
ConnectionMode (page 1)
Description
.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 375

Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.
DualSlave Dual operation protocol – slave function
DualMaster Dual operation protocol – master function

6 back to List of setpoints

COM2 Communication Speed

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Default value 57600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24340 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 378

DRAFT!

Earth Fault CT Ratio

Subgroup: Analog Input 2

CU AIN2 Calibration
Setpoint group CU AIN Calibration Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] the range is defined by an analog sensor curve
0 (number of decimal is
Default value Alternative config NO
given by sensor curve)
Step the step is defined by an analog sensor curve
Comm object 8407 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Calibrating constant to adjust the measured value of controller analog inputs. Physical dimension of
calibrating constant is corresponding to Analog input.
Note: Unit is adjusted via InteliConfig in configuration of analog input 2.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Analog Input 3

CU AIN3 Calibration
Setpoint group CU AIN Calibration Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] the range is defined by an analog sensor curve
0 (number of decimal is
Default value Alternative config NO
given by sensor curve)
Step the step is defined by an analog sensor curve
Comm object 8467 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Calibrating constant to adjust the measured value of controller analog inputs. Physical dimension of
calibrating constant is corresponding to Analog input.
Note: Unit is adjusted via InteliConfig in configuration of analog input 3.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 382

DRAFT!

Subgroup: Analog Input 4

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12055 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection Type 1 (page 385).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 384

DRAFT!

Nominal Current 1
Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 12049 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is current limit for generator current protections and means maximal continuous generator current. Nominal
Current can be different from generator rated current value.
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Connection Type 1
Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Mono Phase / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3SplitPhase / 3Ph3Wire / 3Ph4Wire / High
Range [units]
Leg D / Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12058 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 385

DRAFT!

Setpoint visibility Always

Description
Connection type:

Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N

1x CT (Current Transformer)
SplitPhase Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L2 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L3 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L3 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
3x CT (Current Transformer)

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 386

DRAFT!

3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection

Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
3x CT (Current Transformer)
Autodetect High Leg Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=140V
L2 >=140V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=140V

3PH3Wire or 3Ph4Wire
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V

SplPhL1L2
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 <= 20V

SplPhL1L3SplitPhase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V

Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V

Voltage Autodetect shutdown

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 472) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 387

DRAFT!

ECU Speed Adjustment 1

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 14337 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Power 1
Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 12046 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 263) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 211) is adjusted to Monophase or
Splitphase or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect detects connection type as
3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.

Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 388

DRAFT!

Nominal Power Split Phase 1

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 15771 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 211)
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload
BOC (page 263) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 211) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or Splitphase.

Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12056 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 391).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 472) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 390

DRAFT!

Nominal Current 2
Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 12050 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is current limit for generator current protections and means maximal continuous generator current. Nominal
Current can be different from generator rated current value.
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 472) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Connection type 2
Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Mono Phase / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3SplitPhase / 3Ph3Wire / 3Ph4Wire / High
Range [units]
Leg D / Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12059 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 391

DRAFT!

Setpoint visibility Always

Description
Connection type:

Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N

1x CT (Current Transformer)
SplitPhase Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L2 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L3 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L3 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
3x CT (Current Transformer)

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 392

DRAFT!

3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection

Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
3x CT (Current Transformer)
Autodetect
High Leg Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=140V
L2 >=140V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=140V

3PH3Wire or 3Ph4Wire
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V

SplPhL1L2
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 <= 20V

SplPhL1L3SplitPhase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V

Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V

Voltage Autodetect shutdown

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 472) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 393

DRAFT!

ECU Speed Adjustment 2

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 14338 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 472) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Power 2
Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 12047 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 263) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 2 (page 391) is adjusted to Monophase or
Splitphase or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect detects connection type as
3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 472) is active.

Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 394

DRAFT!

Nominal Power Split Phase 2

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 15772 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 391)
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload BOC
(page 263) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 2 (page 391) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or Splitphase.

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 472) is active.

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12057 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 3 (page 397).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 472) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 396

DRAFT!

Nominal Current 3
Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 12051 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is current limit for generator current protections and means maximal continuous generator current. Nominal
Current can be different from generator rated current value.
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 472) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Connection type 3
Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Mono Phase / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3SplitPhase / 3Ph3Wire / 3Ph4Wire / High
Range [units]
Leg D / Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12060 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 397

DRAFT!

Setpoint visibility Always

Description
Connection type:

Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N

1x CT (Current Transformer)
SplitPhase Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L2 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L3 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L3 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
3x CT (Current Transformer)

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 398

DRAFT!

3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection

3PH3Wire or 3Ph4Wire
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V

SplPhL1L2
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 <= 20V

SplPhL1L3SplitPhase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V

Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V

Voltage Autodetect shutdown

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 472) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 399

DRAFT!

ECU Speed Adjustment 3

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 15199 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 472) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Power 3
Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 12048 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 263) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 3 (page 397) is adjusted to Monophase or
Splitphase or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect detects connection type as
3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 472) is active.

Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 400

DRAFT!

Nominal Power Split Phase 3

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 15773 Related applications AMF, MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 3 (page 397)
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload BOC
(page 263) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 3 (page 397) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or Splitphase.

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 472) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

8.1.3 Values
What values are:
Values (or quantities) are analog or binary data objects, measured or computed by the controller, that are
intended for reading from the controller screen, PC, MODBUS, etc. Values are organized into groups according
to their meaning.
For full list of values go to the chapter List of values (page 402).

Invalid flag
If valid data is not available for a particular value, the invalid flag is set to it. This situation may be due to the
following:
The value is not being evaluated in the scope of the current application and configuration.
Sensor fail has been detected on an analog input.
The configured ECU or extension module does not provide the particular value.
The communication with the ECU or extension module is interrupted.
A value containing the invalid flag is displayed as “####” in InteliConfig and on the controller screen. If such a
value is read out via MODBUS, it will contain the data 32768 in the case of signed values and 65535 in the case
of unsigned values.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 401

List of values

Group: Engine 405 Load kVA L1 414 Group: Statistics 422

ECU AIN 1 405 Load kVA L2 414 Genset kWh 422
ECU AIN 2 405 Load kVA L3 414 Genset kVArh 422
ECU AIN 3 405 Load kVAr 414 Genset kVArh 422
ECU AIN 4 406 Load kVAr L1 415 Mains kWh 423
ECU AIN 5 406 Load kVAr L2 415 Mains kVArh 423
ECU AIN 6 406 Load kVAr L3 415 Maintenance 1 423
ECU AIN 7 406 Load kW 415 Maintenance 2 423
ECU AIN 8 407 Load kW L1 416 Maintenance 3 424
ECU AIN 9 407 Load kW L2 416 Maintenance 4 424
ECU-AIN-EXT-1 407 Load kW L3 416 Maintenance 5 424
ECU Frequency Select 408 Load Power Factor 416 Maintenance 6 424
ECU State 408 Load Power Factor L1 417 Num E-Stops 424
RPM 408 Load Power Factor L2 417 Num Starts 425
Speed Request 409 Load Power Factor L3 417 Pulse Counter 1 425
Required RPM 409 Group: Mains 417 Pulse Counter 2 425
Group: Generator 409 Mains Frequency 417 Rental 1 425
Earth Fault Current 409 Mains Voltage L1-N 417 Rental 2 425
Generator Frequency 409 Mains Voltage L2-N 418 Running Hours 426
Generator Voltage L1-L2 410 Mains Voltage L3-N 418 Shutdowns 426
Generator Voltage L1-N 410 Mains Voltage L1-L2 418 Time Till Empty 1 426
Generator Voltage L2-L3 410 Mains Voltage L2-L3 418 Time Till Empty 2 426
Generator Voltage L2-N 410 Mains Voltage L3-L1 418 Time Till Empty 3 427
Generator Voltage L3-L1 410 Group: Dual operation 419 Total Fuel Consumption 427
Generator Voltage L3-N 411 Master Running Hours 419 Group: Info 427
Nominal Current 411 Running Hours To Swap 419 Active Application 427
Nominal Power 411 Slave Running Hours 419 Application 428
Nominal Voltage 411 Group: Controler I/O 419 Breaker State 428
Group: Load 412 Battery Volts 419 Connection Type 428
Load Current L1 412 Binary Inputs 420 Engine State 428
Load Current L2 412 Binary Outputs 420 FW Branch 428
Load Current L3 412 Coolant Temp 420 FW Version 429
Load Character 412 D+ 420 ID String 429
Load Character L1 413 E-Stop 421 Load Shedding Status 429
Load Character L2 413 Fuel Level 421 SPI Module A 429
Load Character L3 413 Not Used 421 SPI Module B 429
Load kVA 413 Oil Pressure 421 Timer Text 430

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 402

Timer Value 430 User Buttons 24 437 Current Gateway 452
Group: Log Bout 430 User Buttons 25 438 Current IP Address 452
Log Bout 1 430 User Buttons 26 438 Current Subnet Mask 452
Log Bout 2 430 User Buttons 27 438 Ethernet PHY Mode 453
Log Bout 3 431 User Buttons 28 438 ETH Interface Status 453
Log Bout 4 431 User Buttons 29 438 Last Email Results 454
Log Bout 5 431 User Buttons 30 439 MAC Address 454
Log Bout 6 431 User Buttons 31 439 Primary DNS 455
Log Bout 7 431 User Buttons 32 439 Secondary DNS 455
Log Bout 8 432 Group: CM-GPRS 439 Group: Date/Time 455
Log Bout 9 432 AirGate ID 439 Date 455
Log Bout 10 432 AirGate Status 440 Time 455
Log Bout 11 432 Cell Diag Codes 441 Group: Fixed Protection
Log Bout 12 432 Cell Error Rate 443 States 456

Log Bout 13 433 Network Status 443 Fixed Protections States 1 456

Cell Signal Lev 444 Fixed Protections States 2 456

Group: User Buttons 433
User Buttons 1 433 Last Email Result 445 Fixed Protections States 3 456

User Buttons 2 433 Network Mode 446 Fixed Protections States 4 456

User Buttons 3 433 Network Name 446 Fixed Protections States 5 457

User Buttons 4 433 Group: CM-4G-GPS 446 Group: User Protection

States 457
User Buttons 5 434 Active Satellites 446
User Protections States 1 457
User Buttons 6 434 AirGate ID 446
User Protections States 2 457
User Buttons 7 434 AirGate Servicing Node 447
User Protections States 3 457
User Buttons 8 434 AirGate Status 447
User Protections States 4 458
User Buttons 9 434 Altitude 447
User Protections States 5 458
User Buttons 10 435 Cell Signal Lev 448
User Protections States 6 458
User Buttons 11 435 Current IP Address 448
User Protections States 7 458
User Buttons 12 435 GPS Status 448
User Protections States 8 458
User Buttons 13 435 HomePosDist 448
User Protections States 9 459
User Buttons 14 435 Last Email Result 449
User Protections States 10 459
User Buttons 15 436 Latitude 450
Group: Plug-In I/O 459
User Buttons 16 436 Longitude 450
EM Analog Input A 1 459
User Buttons 17 436 Network Mode 450
EM Analog Input A 2 459
User Buttons 18 436 Network Name 450
EM Analog Input A 3 459
User Buttons 19 436 Network Status 451
EM Analog Input A 4 460
User Buttons 20 437 Primary DNS 451
EM Analog Input A 5 460
User Buttons 21 437 Speed 451
EM Analog Input A 6 460
User Buttons 22 437 Group: CM-Ethernet 451
EM Analog Input A 7 460
User Buttons 23 437 AirGate ID 451
EM Analog Input A 8 460
AirGate Status 452

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 403

EM Analog Input A 9 461 PLC Resource 6 468
EM Analog Input A 10 461 PLC Resource 7 468
EM Analog Input A 11 461 PLC Resource 8 469
EM Analog Input A 12 461 6 back to Controller
EM Analog Input A 13 461 objects

EM Analog Input A 14 462

EM Analog Input A 15 462
EM Analog Input A 16 462
EM Analog Input B 1 462
EM Analog Input B 2 462
EM Analog Input B 3 463
EM Analog Input B 4 463
EM Analog Input B 5 463
EM Analog Input B 6 463
EM Analog Input B 7 463
EM Analog Input B 8 464
EM Analog Input B 9 464
EM Analog Input B 10 464
EM Analog Input B 11 464
EM Analog Input B 12 464
EM Analog Input B 13 465
EM Analog Input B 14 465
EM Analog Input B 15 465
EM Analog Input B 16 465
EM BIO A 465
EM BIO B 466
Group: PLC 466
PLC-BOUT 1 466
PLC-BOUT 2 466
PLC-BOUT 3 466
PLC-BOUT 4 466
PLC-BOUT 5 467
PLC-BOUT 6 467
PLC-BOUT 7 467
PLC Resource 1 467
PLC Resource 2 467
PLC Resource 3 468
PLC Resource 4 468
PLC Resource 5 468

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 404

DRAFT!

Group: Engine

ECU AIN 1

Value group Engine Related FW 1.0.0

Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10153 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU AIN 2

Value group Engine Related FW 1.0.0

Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10154 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

ECU AIN 3

Value group Engine Related FW 1.0.0

Units Depends on ECU value
Comm object 10155 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 405

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 406

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 407

DRAFT!

0% 1350 RPM 0%
50% 1500 RPM 50%
100% 1650 RPM 100%

Note: Accelerator pedal position will be 0 if the engine is not running or loaded.

6 back to List of values

Required RPM

Value group Engine Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 9628 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L1-N

Value group Generator Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 8192 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator voltage on phase 1.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L2-L3

Value group Generator Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 9629 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L2 and L3 phases.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L2-N

Value group Generator Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 8193 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator voltage on phase 2.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L3-L1

Value group Generator Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 9630 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L3 and L1 phases.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 410

DRAFT!

Generator Voltage L3-N

DRAFT!

Group: Load

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 412

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 413

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 414

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 415

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 416

6 back to List of values

Group: Mains

Mains Frequency

Value group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units Hz
Comm object 8211 Related applications AMF
Description
Frequency of Mains.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L1-N

Value group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 8195 Related applications AMF
Description
Mains voltage on phase 1.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 417

DRAFT!

Mains Voltage L2-N

Value group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 8196 Related applications AMF
Description
Mains voltage on phase 2.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L3-N

Value group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 8197 Related applications AMF
Description
Mains voltage on phase 3.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L1-L2

Value group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 9631 Related applications AMF
Description
Mains phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L2-L3

Value group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 9632 Related applications AMF
Description
Mains phase to phase voltage between L2 and L3 phases.

6 back to List of values

Mains Voltage L3-L1

Value group Mains Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 9633 Related applications AMF
Description
Mains phase to phase voltage between L3 and L1 phases.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 418

DRAFT!

Group: Dual operation

Master Running Hours

Value group Dual operation Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm object 16044 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is actual value of running hours of Master controller used in dual operation function (Running Hours
(page 426) + Running Hours Base (page 291)).

6 back to List of values

Running Hours To Swap

Value group Dual operation Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm object 16046 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value shows how long it will take until the swap between gen-sets will be made.

6 back to List of values

Slave Running Hours

Value group Dual operation Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm object 16045 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This is actual value of running hours of Slave controller used in dual operation function (Running Hours
(page 426) + Running Hours Base (page 291)).

6 back to List of values

Group: Controler I/O

Battery Volts

Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.0.0

Units V
Comm object 8213 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Controller supply voltage.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 419

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 420

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 421

DRAFT!

Group: Statistics

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 422

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 423

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 424

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 425

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 426

DRAFT!

Time Till Empty 3

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0

Units minutes
Comm object 13772 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Assessment in minutes when the fuel tank will be empty.
Note: This value is based on setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 252) and value from ECU Fuel Rate.
For correct calculation of this value is necessary to have configured ECU which send Fuel Rate value,
otherwise this value can’t be calculated.

6 back to List of values

Total Fuel Consumption

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0

Units L
Comm object 9040 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Value containing total amount of consumed fuel by engine. The controller automatically updates this value
every 30 s. The controller can calculate it in three ways:
Direct reading from ECU
Calculation based on actual fuel consumption reading from ECU
Calculation from fuel level drop in tank (using Fuel Level Analog Input + Fuel Tank Volume (page
252) setpoint)
Note: The accuracy of Total Fuel Consumption depends on the precision of ECU values or precision of
Fuel Tank Volume (page 252) and fuel level sensor.

6 back to List of values

Group: Info

Active Application

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14446 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This Value mirrors the active application in the controller.
The intend of use it is to display the value of the active application in InteliConfig or at the screen of the
controller.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 427

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 428

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 429

DRAFT!

Timer Text

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10040 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains the numeric code of the "Current process timer" text which is shown on the main screen
of the controller.
The assignment of texts to the codes can be obtained using InteliConfig. Open any connection (also offline
with a previously saved archive) and go to the Tools ribbon -> Generate CFG image (all). The resulting file
will contain the assignment of texts to the codes.

6 back to List of values

Timer Value

Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0

Units [HH:MM:SS]
Comm object 14147 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The value contains the "Current process timer" value which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Group: Log Bout

Log Bout 1

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9143 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 2

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9144 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 430

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9149 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 431

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 432

DRAFT!

Log Bout 13

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11900 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 434

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 435

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 436

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 437

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 438

DRAFT!

Group: CM-GPRS

AirGate ID

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24309 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
InteliConfig or any other supported PC tool.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 439

DRAFT!

AirGate Status

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24308 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.

Code Description
0 SIM card is not inserted
1 Controller registered, waiting for authorization
2 Not possible to register, controller blacklisted
3 Not possible to register, server has no more capacity
4 Not possible to register, other reason
5 Controller registered and authorized

6 back to List of values

6 back to List of values

Cell Error Rate

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.0.0
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Comm object 24300 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains information about relative quality of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS module
or by CM-4G-GPS module. The lower value means higher quality of signal.

6 back to List of values

Network Status

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.0.0
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Comm object 24290 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
The text of this value represents the status of the GSM modem.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 443

DRAFT!

Cell Signal Lev

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.0.0
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Comm object 24302 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
This value contains information about relative strength of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS
module or by CM-4G-GPS module. It is a relative value helping to find the best signal and for troubleshooting
cases.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 444

DRAFT!

Group: CM-4G-GPS

Active Satellites

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24265 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Number of available satellites for GPS location.

6 back to List of values

AirGate ID

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 446

DRAFT!

AirGate Servicing Node

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
.

6 back to List of values

AirGate Status

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24308 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.

6 back to List of values

Altitude

CM-4G-GPS (GPS
Value group Related FW 1.0.0
part)
Units m
Comm object 24266 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Actual GPS altitude.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 447

DRAFT!

Cell Signal Lev

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 448

DRAFT!

Last Email Result

6 back to List of values

Network Name

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 450

DRAFT!

Network Status

Value group CM-EthernetInfo Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24345 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
InteliConfig or any other supported PC tool.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 451

DRAFT!

AirGate Status

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24344 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.

Units [-]
Comm object 24183 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current subnet mask.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 452

DRAFT!

Ethernet PHY Mode

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24088 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Ethernet interface mode:

10- HD 10 Mbit Half-Duplex

10- FD 10 Mbit Full-Duplex
100- HD 100 Mbit Half-Duplex
10- FD 100 Mbit Full-Duplex

6 back to List of values

ETH Interface Status

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24180 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current status of ethernet communication.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 453

DRAFT!

Last Email Results

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24332 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.

Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
8 HELO command was refused.
9 EHLO command was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
20 QUIT command was refused.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
27 Email address can’t be read.
30 SMTP server address translation error (from DNS server).
31 Error reading email content data (24327).

6 back to List of values

MAC Address

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24333 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current MAC address of the controller ethernet interface.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 454

DRAFT!

Primary DNS

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24181 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Current domain name server.

6 back to List of values

Secondary DNS

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24100 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Backup domain name server.

6 back to List of values

Group: Date/Time

Date

Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.0.0

Units DD.MM.YYYY
Comm object 24553 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Shows setup date.

6 back to List of values

Units
Comm object 20760 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
.

6 back to List of values

User Protections States 3

Value group User Protection States Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm object 20761 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 457

DRAFT!

User Protections States 4

Value group User Protection States Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm object 20762 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
.

6 back to List of values

User Protections States 5

Value group User Protection States Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm object 20763 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
.

6 back to List of values

User Protections States 6

Value group User Protection States Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm object 20764 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
.

6 back to List of values

User Protections States 7

Value group User Protection States Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm object 20765 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
.

6 back to List of values

User Protections States 8

Value group User Protection States Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm object 20766 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 458

DRAFT!

User Protections States 9

Value group User Protection States Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm object 20767 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
.

6 back to List of values

User Protections States 10

Value group User Protection States Related FW 1.0.0

Units
Comm object 20768 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
.

6 back to List of values

Group: Plug-In I/O

EM Analog Input A 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 460

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 461

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 462

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 463

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 464

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 465

DRAFT!

EM BIO B

Value group Plug-In I/O Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14292 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Binary inputs from extension module in slot B.

6 back to List of values

Group: PLC

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 466

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 467

DRAFT!

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 468

DRAFT!

PLC Resource 8

Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10511 Related applications AMF, MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 469

DRAFT!

8.1.4 Logical binary inputs

What Logical binary inputs are:
Logical binary inputs are inputs for binary values and functions.

Alphabetical groups of Logical binary inputs

LBI: A 472
LBI: B 475
LBI: C 475
LBI: D 477
LBI: E 478
LBI: F 479
LBI: G 480
LBI: H 482
LBI: I 482
LBI: M 482
LBI: N 484
LBI: O 485
LBI: P 485
LBI: R 487
LBI: S 490

For full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter Logical binary inputs alphabetically (page 471).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 470

Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Access Lock 472 Prestart Bypass 485

Alternate Config 2 472 Protection Force Disable 486
Alternate Config 3 472 Pulse Counter 1 486
AMF Start Block 472 Pulse Counter 2 486
Application AMF 473 Rem TEST On Load 487
Application MRS 473 Remote AUTO 487
ATT Force Regen 473 Remote Ctrl Lock 487
ATT Inhibit Regen 474 Remote MAN 488
ATT Interlock 475 Remote OFF 488
Battery Charger 475 Remote Start/Stop 489
Choke Inhibit 475 Remote TEST 490
Coolant Temp 476 Sd Override 490
Dark Mode 477 Start Button 490
Dual Swap Gen-sets 477 Starter 1 Disabled 490
Dual Top Priority 477 Starter 2 Disabled 491
ECU Key Switch 478 Starter Priority 491
ECU Speed Down 478 Stop Button 491
ECU Speed Up 478
6 back to Controller
Emergency MAN 478 objects
Emergency Stop 479
Fault Reset Button 479
Force Protection Disable 479
Fuel Level 480
Fuel Pump On/Off 480
GCB Button 480
GCB Feedback 481
Geo Home Position 481
Geo-Fencing Enable 482
Horn Reset Button 482
Idle Speed 482
Mains Fail Block 482
Manual Load
Reconnection 483
MCB Button 483
MCB Feedback 484
Not Used 484
Oil Pressure 485

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 471

DRAFT!

LBI: A
Access Lock
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1
Description
When this input is active, no setpoints can be adjusted from controller's front panel and controller mode (OFF
/ MAN / AUTO / TEST) cannot be changed. The front panel buttons can not be used as well.
Note: Access Lock does not protect setpoints and mode changing from InteliConfig. To avoid
unqualified changes the selected setpoints have to be password protected.
Also the buttons Fault Reset and Horn Reset are not blocked at all and buttons Start and Stop
in MAN mode are not blocked.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Alternate Config 2
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 859
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the second set (setpoints with number 2).
IMPORTANT: If LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) is used, change of alternate configuration
can be made only in prestart phase. So prestart has to be set up for enough long time.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Alternate Config 3
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 860
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the third set (setpoints with number 3).
IMPORTANT: If LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) is used, change of alternate configuration
can be made only in prestart phase. So prestart has to be set up for enough long time.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

AMF Start Block
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 211
Description
This binary input can allow or block the AMF start. In case of running Gen-set in AUTO mode Gen-set goes
to cooling procedure and stops.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 472

DRAFT!

Application AMF
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object
Description
LBI is used to select AMF mode. It has higher priority than the setpoint Default Application Select (page
220).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Application MRS
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object
Description
LBI is used to select MRS mode. It has higher priority than the setpoint Default Application Select (page
220).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT Force Regen
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object
Description
Note: SPN 3695 serves as a command. Thus the aftertreatment screen and alarm list reflects the
response from ECU (SPN 3703) instead of SPN 3695). User shall be informed about real status of the
ECU and aftertreatment system (SPN3703), not about the command (SPN3695).

Note: Tier4 ECU is recognized when there is an logioindex corresponding to particular controller for SPN
3695 (logioindex 961) or SPN 3696 (logioindex 960). (i.e. RegenInhibitSW or RegenForceSW). Due to
this fact, it is necessary to add one of the two SPNs to each ESC file that contains aftertreatment
support. Without one of these SPNs, the controller would not activate the Aftertreatment screen. (From
latest testing it seems that logioindex 960 has to be first and 961 has to be second for afterteatment
screen to appear)

Note: Selected lamps are controlled by following SPN: 3697, 6915, 3698, 5246, 5245, 3703, 6918.

Note: Severity of lamps state is following (from lowest to highest): inactive, active, blinking slow,
blinking fast. Activation of an icon then means that the state increase its severity. Deactivating of an
icon means that the state decrease its severity.

Note: umping to Aftertreatment screen can be bypassed by jumping to alarmlist instead. This is used on
older controllers and displays.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 473

DRAFT!

ATT Inhibit Regen

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object
Description
Note: SPN 3695 serves as a command. Thus the aftertreatment screen and alarm list reflects the
response from ECU (SPN 3703) instead of SPN 3695). User shall be informed about real status of the
ECU and aftertreatment system (SPN3703), not about the command (SPN3695).

Note: Selected lamps are controlled by following SPN: 3697, 6915, 3698, 5246, 5245, 3703, 6918.

Note: umping to Aftertreatment screen can be bypassed by jumping to alarmlist instead. This is used on
older controllers and displays.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 474

DRAFT!

ATT Interlock
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object
Description
Note: SPN 3695 serves as a command. Thus the aftertreatment screen and alarm list reflects the
response from ECU (SPN 3703) instead of SPN 3695). User shall be informed about real status of the
ECU and aftertreatment system (SPN3703), not about the command (SPN3695).

Note: Selected lamps are controlled by following SPN: 3697, 6915, 3698, 5246, 5245, 3703, 6918.

Note: umping to Aftertreatment screen can be bypassed by jumping to alarmlist instead. This is used on
older controllers and displays.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: B
Battery Charger
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 623
Description
When binary input is active and its delay Battery Charger Fail Delay (page 258) is out of time then alarm
Wrn Battery Charger Fail (page 599) is activated, written into history log and logical binary output AL
BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 1) is activated.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: C
Choke Inhibit
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 946
Description
Logical binary input CHOKE INHIBIT prevent Choke functionality when logical binary output CHOKE (PAGE
503) is activated. If CHOKE INHIBIT is activated when CHOKE LBO is active, CHOKE LBO is deactivated
immediately and vice versa if LBI CHOKE INHIBIT is deactivated and LBO CHOKE should be active then is
activated.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 475

DRAFT!

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Coolant Temp
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 625
Description
Binary input for COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 547) protection.

Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
Stp Binary input is used for slow stop protection
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 476

DRAFT!

LBI: D
Dark Mode
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 930
Description
This binary input activates function of dark mode. It means that backlight of display is turn off (information on
controller screens are not affected) and LEDs (Mains, Generator, Load, Breakers, etc.) are turn off (LEDs
don’t react on normal condition of their activation and deactivation).
Note: After deactivation of dark mode, backlight of display is turned on and than behaves normally.

Note: After deactivation of dark mode, Front Face status LEDs are turned on due to current situation of
gen-set.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Dual Swap Gen-sets
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 947
Description
This LBI enables or disables swapping of gen-sets on load in dual operation. This LBI has higher priority then
setpoint Swap Gen-sets (page 291). This LBI is accepted only in Master controller.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Dual Top Priority
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 954
Description
This LBI defines, which gen-set has higher priority in dual operation mode. If this LBI is active on one gen-
set, this gen-set is used in dual operation function (running hours values are not used to decide, which gen-
set should start).
Setpoint Swap Gen-sets (page 291) or LBI DUAL SWAP GEN-SETS (PAGE 477) has higher priority than this
LBI.
Example: Engine 1 is running. LBI Top Priority is activated on engine 2. If swapping of gen-sets is
disabled, nothing happens. If swapping of gen-sets is enabled, engine 2 is started and engine 1 is
stopped.

Note: If this LBI is active on both gen-sets, the behavior is not changed. Decision is based on running
hours values.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 477

DRAFT!

LBI: E
ECU Key Switch
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 951
Description
This binary input is used to switch on ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506), when engine start is not requested. It
is intended to enable engine values reading, when engine doesn't run.
When this binary input is active, binary output ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) is active too.
When this binary input is inactive, function of ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) is not affected.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Speed Down
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 164
Description
This binary input is used to set the setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 263) by binary inputs. When the
LBI is activated the setpoint is decreased by 2%.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Speed Up
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 165
Description
This binary input is used to set the setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 263) by binary inputs. When the
LBI is activated the setpoint is increase by 2%.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Emergency MAN
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 45
Description
This input is designed to allow the Gen-set system or breakers to be controlled externally, not by the
controller. This feature can be useful in case of some failure, which disables the Gen-set or breakers to be
controlled by the controller, but the gen-set itself is operational.
The controller behaves in the following way:
Shows the text EmergMan in the engine status on the main screen.
Stops all functions regarding the Gen-set or breaker control, deactivates all outputs related to it.
Stop Fail alarm is not being evaluated and stop solenoid is not activated if nonzero speed is detected.
When the input is deactivated, the controller takes control according to the situation in the moment of
deactivation, i.e. the Gen-set remains running loaded if it was running and GCB was closed in the
moment the input was deactivated.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 478

DRAFT!

Emergency Stop
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 40
Description
The shutdown procedure will start immediately when this input is activated. Input is inverted (NC = normaly
closed) in default configuration.
Note: In case of controller hardware or software fail, safe stop of the engine doesn’t have to be ensured.
To back-up the Emergency Stop function it is recommended to connect separate circuit for
disconnection of Fuel Solenoid and Starter signals.

For more detail see chapter recommended wiring.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: F
Fault Reset Button
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 191
Description

Binary input has the same function as Fault Reset button on the InteliLite 4 front panel.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Force Protection Disable
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 16
Description
Selected protections are disabled, if LBI: Force Protection Disable is active..
Activation and deactivation of this binary input will create history record:
Force Protection Disable active
Force Protection Disable inactive
Behavior depends on configuration of LBI – normally close or normally open.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 479

DRAFT!

Fuel Level
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 626
Description
Binary input for FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 548) protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Fuel Pump On/Off
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 694
Description
This binary input is used for manual control of binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 509). The output is
deactivated automatically as soon as fuel level reaches 100 %.
Note: This binary input is basically designed for ON and OFF switch (switch with arrestment in these
positions) because controller reacts to rising and falling edge of signal in this input.

IMPORTANT: When binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 480) is configured then binary
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 509) is control by this binary input.

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to configure analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 548) for proper
function of this binary input.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: G
GCB Button
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 193
Description

Binary input has the same function as GCB button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 480

DRAFT!

GCB Feedback
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 63
Description
Use this input for indication whether the generator circuit breaker is open or closed.

Image 8.47 GCB Feedback 1

Image 8.48 GCB Feedback 2

Note: InteliLite 4 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Geo Home Position
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 219
Description
This binary input can be used to adjust home position of gen-set. In case that binary input is active, setpoints
Home Latitude (page 356) and Home Longitude (page 357) are adjusted automatically from actual
coordinates from GPS signal.
Note: Input has to be activated for at least 2 seconds.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 481

DRAFT!

Geo-Fencing Enable
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 218
Description
This binary input enables or disables Fence 1 Protection (page 358) and Fence 2 Protection (page 359) if
Group: Geo-Fencing (page 356) is adjusted to value "LBI Enable".

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: H
Horn Reset Button
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 192
Description

Binary input has the same function as Horn reset button on the InteliLite 4 front panel.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: I
Idle Speed
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 624
Description
This binary input changes cooling speed from nominal to idle.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: M
Mains Fail Block
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 622
Description
If the input is active, the automatic start of the Gen-set at Mains failure is blocked. In case of running Gen-
set in AUTO mode, timer Mains Return Delay (page 279) is started and when it elapses GCB is opened,
Gen-set goes to cooling procedure and stops. When GCB is opened after Transfer Delay (page 280)Open
Transition Min Break (page 1) the MCB is closed.
Note: This input simulates healthy Mains.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 482

DRAFT!

Manual Load Reconnection

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 60
Description
This input is used for manual reconnection of the last disconnected part of the load, if the load has dropped
below the setpoint Load Reconnection Level (page 294). This works only if automatic reconnection is
disabled, i.e. the setpoint Auto Load Reconnection (page 295) = Disabled.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

MCB Button
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 194
Description

This binary input has the same function as MCB button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in
MAN mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 483

DRAFT!

MCB Feedback
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 65
Description
Use this input for indication whether the mainsbus circuit breaker is open or closed.

Image 8.49 MCB Feedback 1

Image 8.50 MCB Feedback 2

Note: InteliLite 4 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: N
Not Used
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 184
Description
Binary input has no function. Use this configuration when binary input is not used.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 484

DRAFT!

LBI: O
Oil Pressure
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 43
Description
Binary input for OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 550) protection.

IMPORTANT: This binary input is also used for evaluating engine running condition.

Example: Normally close connection – when LBI is active then oil pressure is OK and is higher than
starting oil pressure.

Note: In case that you want to use binary input of oil pressure sensor just for protection please use one
of the BIN PROTECTION 1 (PAGE 1).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: P
Prestart Bypass
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object
Description
This logic binary input enables or disables protections adjusted as LBI Enable.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 485

DRAFT!

Protection Force Disable

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 16
Description
Activation of this LBI disables selected protections.
Proper history record is written to the history log.
Protection Force Disable 1 active
Protection Force Disable 1 inactive

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Pulse Counter 1
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 87
Description
This is the input of the Pulse Counter 1 function. The module counts pulses at the input and if the input
pulses counter reaches value given by the setpoint Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1 (page 259) the
counter value Pulse Counter 1 (page 425) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0. Both
counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Pulse Counter 2
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 88
Description
This is the input of the Pulse Counter 2 function. The module counts pulses at the input and if the input
pulses counter reaches value given by the setpoint Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2 (page 259) the
counter value Pulse Counter 2 (page 425) is increased by 0,1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0. Both
counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 486

DRAFT!

LBI: R
Rem TEST On Load
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 61
Description
Closing of the GCB in MRS or transferring of the load from the mains to Gen-set in AMF.

Application TEST Remote TEST On Load

Active: Gen-set is put to TEST mode. On the top of it the GCB is
Gen-set started and
closed. The same behaviour like the REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE
running until the
MRS 489)Remote Start/Stop.
TEST mode
Inactive: Gen-set comes back to the original mode and behaves
deactivated.
accordingly to this mode and other conditions.
Active: Gen-set is put to TEST mode. On the top of it the load is
Gen-set started and transferred to the Gen-set. The open load transfer is performed.
running until the Inactive: Gen-set comes back to the original mode and behaves
AMF
TEST mode accordingly to this mode and other conditions. (the load can be
deactivated. transferred back to the mains (OFF, AUTO) or stay on the Gen-set
(MAN).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote AUTO
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 620
Description
The controller is switched to the AUTO mode (there are fourthree modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when
this binary input is active. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
This binary input has the lowest priority from Remote OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST binary inputs
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote Ctrl Lock
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 4
Description
If the input is active, the controller will not accept any actions regarding the system control – e.g. writing of
commands and setpoint changes via remote communication interfaces.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 487

DRAFT!

Remote MAN
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 618
Description
The controller is switched to the MAN mode (there are fourthree modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when
this binary input is active. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote OFF
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 617
Description
The controller is switched to the OFF mode (there are fourthree modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when
this binary input is active. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 488

DRAFT!

Remote Start/Stop
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 38
Description
Use this input to start and stop the Gen-set in AUTO and TEST mode.
Note: If the binary input Remote Start/Stop is active and engine is running and mains failure occurs, the
MCB breaker opens, after Transfer Delay (page 280) the GCB breaker is closed. Once the mains is
OK, the Mains Return Delay (page 279) elapses and the GCB breaker is opened. Then after Transfer
Delay (page 280) is MCB breaker closed. Gen-set remains running as long as binary input Rem
Start/Stop is active. For more details see timing diagram below.

Image 8.51 Remote Start/Stop

Taken action in AMF application (AUTO Mode)

Start the Gen-set and stay running with opened GCB if Mains OK.
Active Go to Island if Mains fails (due to AMF function).
If Mains is not OK the AMF function starts the Gen-set to Island anyway.
Stop the Gen-set if Mains is OK
Inactive
If Mains not OK the Gen-set stays running due to AMF function anyway.

Taken action in MRS application (AUTO Mode)

Starts the Gen-set – No delay
Active
Close GCB
Open GCB
Inactive
Stop the Gen-set – No delay

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 489

DRAFT!

Remote TEST
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 621
Description
The controller is switched to the TEST mode (there are fourthree modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when
this binary input is active. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: S
Sd Override
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 44
Description
If this input is active, all alarms except Emergency Stop and Overspeed are suppressed. The suppressed
alarms will be displayed in the alarm list, but they will not take effect regarding the Gen-set control.
Note: Sd Override (page 490) is indicated in the alarm list if Sd Override mode is active to inform the
operator that the engine is not protected.

IMPORTANT: MISUSE OF THIS INPUT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE GEN-SET!

Note: User protection Sd Override is not blocked

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Start Button
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 189
Description

Binary input has the same function as Start Button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Starter 1 Disabled
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object
Description
When Gen-set has two starters available this LBI is used to disable starter 1.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 490

DRAFT!

Starter 2 Disabled
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object
Description
When Gen-set has two starters available this LBI is used to disable starter 2.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Starter Priority
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object
Description
By activating this LBI, starter 2 has higher priority in dual starter operation.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Stop Button
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 190
Description

Binary input has the same function as Stop Button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
Mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 491

DRAFT!

8.1.5 Logical binary outputs

What Logical binary outputs are:
Logical binary outputs are outputs for binary values and functions.

Alphabetical groups of Logical binary outputs

LBO: A 494
LBO: C 503
LBO: D 505
LBO: E 505
LBO: F 509
LBO: G 511
LBO: H 518
LBO: I 519
LBO: L 521
LBO: M 522
LBO: N 531
LBO: P 531
LBO: R 533
LBO: S 535
LBO: T 539
LBO: V 539

For full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 493).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common Alarm Only
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 11
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one alarm of type Alarm Only present in the alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common BOC
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9
Description
Output is activated when any BOC alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No BOC alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 499

DRAFT!

AL Common Fls
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 6
Description
Output is activated when any sensor fail alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No sensor fail alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common History Record
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9
Description
This output is closed for 1 second every time alarm of type History Record Only occurs.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common MP
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 10
Description
Signalization of released common mains protection.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common Sd
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 4
Description
Output is activated when any shutdown alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No shutdown alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common Sd Override
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 4
Description
This output is closed 2 seconds after there is at least one alarm of type Shutdown Override present in the
alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 500

DRAFT!

AL Common Wrn
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 3
Description
Output is activated when any warning alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No warning alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Freq Wrn
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1267
Description
This output is active generator frequency warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Frequency
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1266
Description
This output is active when at least one generator frequency alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Voltage
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1263
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Voltage Wrn
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1289
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 501

DRAFT!

AL Mains Fail
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 197
Description
Output for signaling Mains Failure. This output is active when at least one mains frequency BOC or Sd alarm
or at least one mains voltage BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Mains Frequency
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 1271
Description
This output is active when at least one mains frequency BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Mains Voltage
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 1270
Description
This output is active when at least one mains voltage BOC or Sd alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Overcurrent
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 109
Description
This output is active when the BOC Overcurrent IDMT (page 633)MPRBOC Overcurrent IDMT (page 1)
or BOC Short Circuit (page 632)Short Circuit (page 1) alarm is present in alarmlist or isn't confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Alarm
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2
Description
The output is designed to be used as external alarm indication such as a red bulb in the control room etc. The
output is active when at least one unconfirmed alarm is present in the alarmlist and remains active until
confirmation of alarm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 502

DRAFT!

ATT DEF Level Lamp

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2154
Description
This output is active when ATT DEF Level Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT Filter Lamp
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2152
Description
This output is active when ATT Filter Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT HEST Lamp
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1373
Description
This output is closed if ECU send signal HEST Lamp. If ECU stop send HEST LAMP signal binary input will
be opened without no matter if alarms in alarmlist are confirmed or not.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT Inhibited Lamp
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2155
Description
This output is active when ATT Inhibited Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT SCR Error Lamp
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2153
Description
This output is active when ATT SCR Error Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: C
Choke
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2091
Description
Logical binary output for choke valve control. Output CHOKE is activated every time when logical binary

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 503

DRAFT!

output STARTER 1 (PAGE 536) is activated. Output is deactivated when one of these conditions is fulfilled:
Choke Time is elapsed
Generator voltage is higher than Choke Voltage
Logical binary input Choke Inhibit is activated
Or when some of these situations during start occurs:
Any second level alarm
Emergency stop
Stop command
Cranking pause

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Cooling
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 74
Description
The output is active when Gen-set is in Cooling state.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Cooling Pump
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 40
Description
This output is dedicated for coolant pump control. It is activated in the moment the Gen-set is started and
remains active until the Gen-set is stopped and After Cooling Time (page 246) elapses or the cranking
pause or the Emergency Stop occurs or the controller is switched to OFF mode.

Image 8.63 Cooling Pump

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 504

DRAFT!

LBO: D
Dual Operation OK
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2096
Description
This LBO is active when there is not AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 588) alarm in alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: E
ECU Comm OK
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 347
Description
This output is active when an ECU is configured, connected and the communication with the ECU is
established.
Note: When ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) is not configured, output is evaluated all the time. If ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) is configured, output is evaluated only when engine is not stop (ECU POWER
RELAY (PAGE 506) is active).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 505

DRAFT!

ECU Power Relay

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 116
Description
This output is to be used for control of "keyswitch" input of an ECU. If the particular ECU does not have
keyswitch or a similar input, it can be used for control of DC power for the ECU.
The output is activated together with PRESTART (PAGE 531) and remains active for the entire duration that
the engine is running. It is deactivated at the moment that the engine comes to a stop (i.e. together with the
FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 509)).

Image 8.64 ECU Power Relay

IMPORTANT: This LBO also affects evaluation of Sd ECU Communication Fail (page 616) or
Wrn ECU Communication Fail (page 585) alarms. With configured LBO ECU Power Relay,
these alarms are evaluated only when this LBO is active. Without configured LBO ECU
Power Relay, these alarm are evaluated all the time.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ECU Red Lamp
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 350
Description
This output is active when the ECU sends an active “red lamp” flag, i.e. it has detected a critical malfunction
and the engine should not be operated until a service check is performed. This flag is taken from the DM1
frame on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag in their own proprietary frames and some do
not provide the flag at all.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 506

DRAFT!

ECU Run Stop

Image 8.65 Fuel Solenoid 1

Image 8.66 Fuel Solenoid 2

The output is deactivated when:

Emergency Stop comes
Cooled Gen-set is stopped
In pause between repeated starts

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 510

DRAFT!

Gas:
The output closes together with binary output IGNITION (PAGE 520) when engine RPM exceed 30 RPM (fix
value).

Image 8.67 Fuel Solenoid 3

The output is deactivated when:

Emergency Stop comes
Cooled Gen-set is stopped
In pause between repeated starts

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: G
GCB Button Echo
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 35
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
GCB button is pressed on the controller front facia or
GCB button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
GCB command is received via communication line or
the input GCB BUTTON is activated.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

GCB Close/Open
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 41
Description
The output controls the generator circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 511

DRAFT!

Note: InteliLite 4 controllers can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

Image 8.68 GCB Close command

Image 8.69 Repeated GCB Close command

Image 8.70 GCB Open command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 512

DRAFT!

GCB OFF Coil

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 43
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5
seconds.

Image 8.71 GCB OFF Coil command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 513

DRAFT!

GCB ON Coil
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 42
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5 second
pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.

Image 8.72 GCB ON Coil close command

Image 8.73 Repeated GCB ON coil close command

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 514

DRAFT!

Image 8.74 Repeated GCB ON coil close command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

GCB UV Coil
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 44
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of generator circuit breaker. The output is active the
whole time when the generator is running. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the
breaker has to be switched off.

Image 8.75 GCB UV Coil close command

When the Glow Plugs Time (page 233) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 231) then the Glow
Plugs Time (page 233) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 231) is long as normal Glow Plugs Time (page
233).

Image 8.79 Glow Plugs in Cranking Fail Pause 2

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: H
Heartbeat
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 81
Description
This output toggles on/off in a period of 500 ms whenever the controller is switched on and functional.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Horn
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1
Description
The output designed to be used for acoustic indication of a newly appeared alarm. The output is activated
each time a new alarm has appeared and remains active until one of the following events occurs:

Fault reset is pressed

Horn reset is pressed

Horn Timeout (page 223) has elapsed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 518

DRAFT!

HornRes Button Echo

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 31
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
Horn Reset button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Horn Reset button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Horn Reset command is received via communication line or
the input HORN RESET BUTTON is activated.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: I
Idle/Nominal
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 39
Description
This output is used for switching between idle speed and nominal speed of the engine during the startup
phase, if this feature (input) is available on the particular engine. In the case of some EFI engines, the
idle/nominal switching is performed over the communication bus.
The output Idle/Nominal is activated after the timer Idle Time (page 239) elapses. The Idle Time (page
239) starts to countdown when Starting RPM (page 232) reached. The underspeed protection is not
evaluated during fixed 5 seconds period after reaching Starting RPM (page 232). A Start Fail protection
occurs if the RPM drop below 2RPM during idle.

Image 8.80 Idle/Nominal

Note: Connect binary output Idle/Nominal to speed governor to switch the speed:
opened = Idle
closed = Nominal
(for normally open contact type)

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 519

DRAFT!

Ignition
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 37
Description
This output is dedicated to controlling the ignition at a gas engine. the output is active together with binary
output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 509) in the moment when the timer Sd Ventilation Time (page 243) elapsed
and the gen-set reaches at least 30 RPM during cranking. The timer Sd Ventilation Time (page 243)
become active when the gen-set has been stopped for any Sd protection or the controller has been turned on
only before first cranking attempt. the output is deactivated 500 ms after all Additional running engine
indications (page 119) will be inactive. the output is deactivated when the Gen-set has to be stopped or in
pause during repeated starts.

Image 8.81 Ignition 1

Image 8.82 Ignition 2

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 520

DRAFT!

Ignition On

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS

Comm object 1257

Description
This input is on since start button is pressed till the unit is completely stopped (or the engine doesn’t start or
Sd or E-Stop is active)
Note: This function is the same as ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) . Ignition ON stays there from
historical reasons.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: L
Load Shedding Stage 1
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 51
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality

The load shedding outputs are activated (load is beeing shedd) in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated (load is beeing reconnected) in the order 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by the LBO Nr.1 is the less essential load of these three possible loads instances.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Load Shedding Stage 2
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 52
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 521

DRAFT!

Load Shedding Stage 3

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 53
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Load Shedding Stage 4
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 54
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Load Shedding Stage 5
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 55
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: M
Mains Healthy
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 78
Description
This output is active while Mains failure is not detected and Mains voltage and frequency is within limits.
The limits for under/overvoltage and under/overfrequency are the same as for mains voltage/frequency and
can be found in the Mains Settings setpoint group.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 522

DRAFT!

Manual Ready
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1258
Description
This output is active when controller is in MAN mode and the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it
i.e. no red alarm is activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 490) is active (Output READY (PAGE 533) is active).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

MCB Button Echo
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 34
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
MCB button is pressed on the controller front facia or
MCB button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
MCB command is received via communication line or
the input MCB BUTTON is activated.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

MCB Close/Open
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 45
Description
The output controls the mainsbus circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued.
Note: InteliLite 4 controllers can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

Image 8.83 MCB Close command

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 523

DRAFT!

Image 8.84 Repeated MCB Close command

Image 8.85 MCB Open command

Image 8.86 MCB Close command

Image 8.87 Repeated MCB Close command

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 524

DRAFT!

Image 8.88 MCB Open command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 525

DRAFT!

MCB OFF Coil

Image 8.96 MCB UV Coil close command

Image 8.97 MCB UV Coil close command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode AUTO
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 19
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in AUTO mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 530

DRAFT!

Mode MAN
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 18
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in MAN mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode OFF
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 17
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in OFF mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode TEST
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 20
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in TEST mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: N
Not In AUTO
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1248
Description
This output is active when controller isn’t in AUTO mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Not Used
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 286
Description
Output has no function.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: P
Prestart
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 36
Description

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 531

DRAFT!

This output can be used for control of any device, which has to be activated just before start. the output is
active for time period of Prestart Time (page 232). The output is deactivated 100 ms before the STARTER 1
(PAGE 536) output is activated.

Image 8.98 Engine start

When the Prestart Time (page 232) is longer than Cranking Fail Pause (page 231) then the Prestart
Time (page 232) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 231) is long as Cranking Fail Pause (page 231) minus
100 ms.

Image 8.99 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 532

DRAFT!

When the Prestart Time (page 232) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 231) then the Prestart
Time (page 232) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 231) is long as normal Prestart Time (page 232).

Image 8.100 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 2

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: R
Ready
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 62
Description
The binary output is active when the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it i.e. no red alarm is
activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 490) is active.
The binary output is switch on when the Ready state occurs.
The binary output is switch off when the Prestart or the Not Ready or the Stop state occurs i.e. always
except Ready state.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ready To AMF
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF
Comm object 324
Description
the output is active if the Gen-set is ready to start automatically and take the load if the mains fails, i.e.:
the controller is in AMF operating mode
the controller is in AUTO controller mode and
no red alarm is present in the alarmlist
when the red alarm is confirmed during Stop Valve and other requirements are fulfilled then the LBO is
still inactive until the state ready

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 533

DRAFT!

Ready To Load
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 58
Description
the output is active whenever the GCB is closed or can be closed i.e. the stabilization phase is finished, the
Gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 241) timer has elapsed and the Gen-set
voltage and frequency are within limits.
If GCB is open then Gen-set voltage and frequency must be in limits.
If GCB is close then Gen-set voltage and frequency can be out of limits, but protection delay can’t be count
down. If Gen-set voltage and frequency will return into limits until delay is count down then output is still
active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

RegenerationNeeded
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1372
Description
This output is active when DPF lamp from ECU is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Running
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 67
Description
The output is designed to be used as an indication that the Gen-set is running. The output is activated if FUEL
SOLENOID (PAGE 509) is active and STARTER 1 (PAGE 536) and PRESTART (PAGE 531) are deactivated. The
out remains active until engine stop and cooling period elapses.

Image 8.101 Running

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 534

DRAFT!

LBO: S
Sd Override
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 962
Description
The output is active if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 490) input is active and open if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 490) input is
inactive. This output is usually used to send information about SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 490) input into ECU.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Start Button Echo
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 33
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
Start button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Start button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Start command is received via communication line or
the input START BUTTON is activated.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 535

DRAFT!

Starter 1
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 24
Description
This output is dedicated for starter motor control. The number of cranking attempts is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Attempts (page 231) in Engine Settings group. Cranking fail pause is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Fail Pause (page 231).

Image 8.102 Starter

The starter output opens when:

the "firing" speed is reached
maximum time of cranking is exceeded
request to stop comes up
D+ value is higher than D+ Threshold (page 248)
Oil pressure value is higher than Starting Oil Pressure (page 233)
Generator voltage >25 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 214) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page
214) (any phase)

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Starter 2
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Still Log 0
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 26
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 0.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 536

DRAFT!

Still Log 1
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 27
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 1.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Stop Button Echo
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 32
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
Stop button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Stop button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Stop command is received via communication line or
the input STOP BUTTON is activated.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Stop Pulse
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 25
Description
Output is active for 1 second after STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 537) output activation. This signal is sent to ECU
in case of engine stop request.

Image 8.103 Stop Pulse

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Stop Solenoid
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 23
Description

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 537

DRAFT!

This output is dedicated to control the stop solenoid (valve). The output is activated when an engine stop
command is received and is deactivated 12 s after last running engine indication went off, i.e. engine is
stopped.

Image 8.104 Stop Solenoid 1

Image 8.105 Stop Solenoid 2

Note: If Additional running engine indications (page 119) went off during 5 s pause than Stop
Solenoid is not activated again otherwise stop solenoid is activated again.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 538

DRAFT!

Supplying Load
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 1249
Description
The binary output depends on measured generator active power. Power is compared with generator nominal
active power with use of hysteresis and with delay of switch 1 s.
When the measured active power is equal to or bigger than 5 % of Nominal Power (page 209) for 1 s then
the binary output is active.
When the measured active power is equal to or lower than 3 % of Nominal Power (page 209) for 1 s then
the binary output is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: T
Temperature Switch
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 563
Description
This is an output from the Temperature switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Temperature Switch On (page 256) and Temperature Switch Off (page 257).

Image 8.106 Temperature Switch

Note: Setpoints Temperature Switch On (page 256) and Temperature Switch Off (page 257) are
invisible until configuration of this LBO.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: V
Ventilation
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 38
Description
This logical binary output is activated at the beginning of start procedure together with PRESTART (PAGE 531)
LBO. Ventilation output is deactivated when engine stops revolving.
Ventilation LBO is also deactivated immediately when EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 479) (or E-Stop) is

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 539

DRAFT!

activated or when controller is switched to OFF mode.

Note: The output is intended for control of an engine room ventilation fan, engine container ventilation
fan, container louvres or similar running gen-set technology.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ventilation Off Pulse
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2090
Description
This logical binary output is activated on falling edge of VENTILATION (PAGE 539) LBO (when engine stops).
The pulse duration is adjusted by Ventilation Pulse Time (page 262) setpoint.
Note: The output is intended for control of an engine room ventilation fan, engine container ventilation
fan, container louvres or similar running gen-set technology.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ventilation On Pulse
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2089
Description
This logical binary output is activated on rising edge of VENTILATION (PAGE 539) LBO (at the begining of
prestart period). The pulse duration is adjusted by Ventilation Pulse Time (page 262) setpoint.
Note: The output is intended for control of an engine room ventilation fan, engine container ventilation
fan, container louvres or similar running gen-set technology.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 540

DRAFT!

8.1.6 Logical analog inputs

What Logical analog inputs are:
Logical analog inputs are inputs for analog values.

Alphabetical groups of Logical analog inputs

LAI: A 543
LAI: C 547
LAI: F 548
LAI: N 549
LAI: O 550

For full list of Logical analog inputs go to the chapter Logical analog inputs alphabetically (page 542).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 541

Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 01 543

IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 545

DRAFT!

AIN Switch 10
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 283
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 49. This analog input controls logical binary output AIN
SWITCH10 (PAGE 498). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints AIN
Switch10 On (page 328) and AIN Switch10 Off (page 329).
Note: This function is not suitable for tristate or binary analog sensors.

IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 546

DRAFT!

LAI: C
Coolant Temp
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 67
Description
Logical analog input designed for coolant temperature value received from analog sensor. For more
information about wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 49. Limits for this protection are
adjusted by setpoints Coolant Temperature Wrn (page 1) and Coolant Temperature Sd (page 1). Delay
is adjusted by setpoint Coolant Temperature Delay (page 1).

Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn+Stp Analog value is used for warning and slow stop protection
Stp Analog value is used for slow stop protection
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Note: This analog function can by also configured on binary input as binary function. In this case chose
COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 476) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is adjusted
via the same setpoint like for analog function.

IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 547

DRAFT!

LAI: F
Fuel Level
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 78
Description
Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor. For more information about wiring
of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 49. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints Fuel Level
Wrn (page 1) and Fuel Level Sd (page 1). Delay is adjusted by setpoint Fuel Level Delay (page 1).

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 252) has to be adjusted correctly.

Note: This analog function can by also configured on binary input as binary function. In this case chose
FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 480) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is adjusted via
the same setpoint like for analog function.

IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 548

DRAFT!

LAI: N
Not Used
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 230
Description
Input has no function.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 549

DRAFT!

LAI: O
Oil Pressure
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 9
Description
Logical analog input designed for oil pressure value received from analog sensor. Limits for this protection
are adjusted by setpoints Oil Pressure Wrn (page 1) and Oil Pressure Sd (page 1). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Oil Pressure Delay (page 1).

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.

Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.

Note: This analog function can by also configured on binary input as binary function. In this case chose
OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 485) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is adjusted
via the same setpoint like for analog function.

IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 550

DRAFT!

8.1.7 PLC
List of PLC groups
For full list of PLC blocks go to the chapter List of PLC blocks (page 551).

List of PLC blocks

Group: Basic logical functions
OR/AND 552
XOR/RS 554

Group: Comparison of analog inputs

Comparator With Hysteresis 555
Comparator With Delay 557

Group: Time functions

Timer 558
Delay 560

Group: Other functions

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 551

DRAFT!

Group: Basic Logical functions

OR/AND
PLC group Basic logical functions

Related FW 1.0.0

Related applications AMF, MRS

Comm object 1

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1..8 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1..8

Outputs

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 552

DRAFT!

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation

Description
The block performs logical operation OR / AND of 2 - 8 binary operands. The inputs as well as the output can be
inverted.

Function OR
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1

Function AND
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

There have to be at least 2 inputs every time. There may be up to 8 inputs configured.

Image 8.107 Configuration of OR/AND block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 553

DRAFT!

XOR/RS
PLC group Basic logical functions
Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 2
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1..2 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1..2

Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation

Description
The block provides logical function of two values – XOR or RS flip-flop. Both inputs and output can be
inverted.

Function XOR
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

Function RS
R S Qn+1
0 0 Qn
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 1 0

Image 8.108 Configuration of XOR/RS block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 554

DRAFT!

Group: Comparison of analog inputs

Comparator With Hysteresis
PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 3
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input Analog No Any Compared value
Input ON Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching on
Input OFF Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching off

Outputs

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 555

DRAFT!

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output

Description
The block compares the input value with the comparative levels. The behavior depends on whether the ON
level is higher than OFF level or vice versa.

Image 8.109 Different On and Off levels

Image 8.110 Configuration of Comp Hyst block

Note: Level On and Level Off can be constants or values from controller.

IMPORTANT: In case that values on inputs have different decimal numbers than the values
are converted and the name of block is red. It is strongly recommended to use values with
the same decimal numbers.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 556

DRAFT!

Comparator With Delay

PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 4
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1 Analog No Any Compared value
Input 2 Analog No Same as Input 1 Comparative level
Delay Analog No 0.0..3000,0 [s] Comparative delay

Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output

Description
The block works as an analog switch. It compares the input value with the comparative level. The output will
switch on if the input is equal or higher than the comparative level for time longer than the delay.

Image 8.111 Principle of delay

Image 8.112 Configuration of Comp Time block

Note: Input 2 and Delay can be constants or values from controller.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 557

DRAFT!

Group: Time functions

Timer
PLC group Time functions

Related FW 1.0.0

Related applications AMF, MRS

Comm object 14

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

The timer runs only if this input is
Run Binary No 0/1
active or not connected
This input reloads the timer to the
Reload Binary No 0/1
initial value
Reload
Analog No 0,0..3276,7 [s] Initial value of the timer
value

Outputs

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 558

DRAFT!

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Timer output

Description
The block works as a countdown timer which is decreased by 1 every PLC cycle. The timer initial value is
adjustable by the "Reload value" input. The timer is automatically reloaded with the initial value when it
reaches zero or it can be reloaded in any other moment using the "reload" input. The timer is held at reload
value until the reload input is deactivated. The timer output is inverted always when the timer is reloaded.

Image 8.113 Principle of timer

Image 8.114 Configuration of Timer block

Note: Input reload value can be constant or value from controller.

Note: If you want the output to start at logical 0, tick First down option. Otherwise the output will start at
logical 1.

IMPORTANT: In case that inputs are not connected and First down option isn´t tick, than
output is active.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 559

DRAFT!

Delay
PLC group Time functions
Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 33
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input Binary No 0/1 Input signal to be delayed
Delay of the rising edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200,0..3200,0
Analog No length generated by rising edge of the
up [s, m, h]
input
Delay of the falling edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200,0..3200,0
Analog No length generated by falling edge of the
down [s, m, h]
input
Resets the output to logical 0. The
output remains in logical 0 until new
Input reset Binary No 0/1
rising edge appears on Input (when
Input reset is deactivated already)

Outputs

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 560

DRAFT!

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Output signal

Description
This block can work in two modes of operation:
Delay mode - the rising edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time up" when a rising
edge at the input is detected. The falling edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time
down" when a falling edge at the input is detected. If the delayed falling edge at the output came
earlier than the delayed rising edge, then no pulse would be generated at the output.
Pulse mode - a pulse of "input time up" length is generated at the output when a rising edge is
detected, a pulse of "input time down" length is generated at the output when a falling edge is
detected.

Image 8.115 Delay modes principles

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 561

DRAFT!

Image 8.116 Configuration of Delay block

Note: If Input time up or Input time down value is <0, this input is internally set to zero.

Note: Input time up and Input time down values can be constants or values from controller.

Note: Use Pulse on edge option to choose between delay and pulse mode.

List of User Protection States

6 back to Controller objects

User Protections States 1

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 20759
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 2

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 20760
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 3

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 20761
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 567

DRAFT!

User Protections States 4

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 20762
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 5

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 20763
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 6

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 20764
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 7

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 20765
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 8

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 20766
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 568

DRAFT!

User Protections States 9

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 20767
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

User Protections States 10

Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS
Comm object 20768
Description
This is a group of user protection states.

6 back to User Protection States

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 569

6 back to Alarms
Wrn Module: Slot 1
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with preconfigured
Description module 1.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module: Slot 2
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 2
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with preconfigured
Description module 2.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module: Slot 3
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 3
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with preconfigured
Description module 3.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 574

DRAFT!

Wrn Module: Slot 4

Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 4
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with preconfigured
Description module 4.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module: Slot 5
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 5
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with preconfigured
Description module 5.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module(slotA) - false module
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - fake module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module(slotB) - false module
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - fake module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 575

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.

Wrn Alarm Email 2 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 2 (page 368) and email
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm Email 3 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 3 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 3 (page 368) and email
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 581

DRAFT!

Wrn Alarm Email 4 Fail

Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 4 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 4 (page 369) and email
wasn’t send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm SMS 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 369) and SMS
wasn’t sent.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm SMS 2 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 2 (page 370) and SMS
wasn’t sent.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm SMS 3 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 3 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 3 (page 370) and SMS
wasn’t sent.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 582

DRAFT!

Wrn Alarm SMS 4 Fail

Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 4 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 4 (page 371) and SMS
wasn’t sent.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SNMP TRAP 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message SNMP TRAP 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued if TRAP will not be able to reach server.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SNMP TRAP 2 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message SNMP TRAP 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if TRAP will not be able to reach server, or in case there is no
Description
reply for the server

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ECUDiagBlocked
Alarm Type ProtALI
Alarmlist message ECUDiagBlocked
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ECU Communication Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message ECU Communication Fail
With configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) – only when this LBO is
Alarm evaluated active
Without configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) – all the time

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 583

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm occurs when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the
Description ECU is not established or has dropped out.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Wrong Config
Alarm Type ProtALI
Alarmlist message Wrong Config
Alarm evaluated
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued to indicate that content of the configuration in controller unit
Description
does not match to configuration.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn RTC Battery Flat
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message RTC Battery Flat
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued if RTC battery is weak or flat and has to be changed.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn PasswEnterBlock
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message PasswEnterBlock
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued to indicate that user will not be able to type in password for set
amount of time.
Description Note: This is cause by too many invalid attempts.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 584

DRAFT!

Wrn ECU Communication Fail

Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU Communication Fail
With configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) - only when this LBO is
Alarm evaluated active
Without configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) - all the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU is not established or has dropped out.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI ECU Yellow Lamp
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message ECU Yellow Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Yellow lamp is
activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 502)is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
Description alarm automatically disappear.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI ECU Red Lamp
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message ECU Red Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when an red ECU alarm is logged in Alarm List.
Note: This lamp can be ignored during prestart phase. Use InteliConfig to
Description enable this function.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI ECU Wait To Start
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message ECU Wait To Start
Alarm evaluated Only when ECU is connected
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Wait To Start lamp
is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 502)is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
Description alarm automatically disappear.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 585

DRAFT!

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI ATT Filter Lamp
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message ATT Filter Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued to indicate the ATT Filter lamp.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI ATT HEST Lamp
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message ATT HEST Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued to indicate HEST Lamp.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI ATT SCR Error Lamp
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message ATT SCR Error Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued to indicate SCR error lamp.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI ATT DEF Level Lamp
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message ATT DEF Level Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued to indicate DEF Level lamp.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI ATT Inhibited Lamp
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message ATT Inhibited Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 586

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm is issued to indicate Inhibited Lamp.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI ATT interlock Active
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message ATT interlock Active
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS

Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI ATT Force Regen Active
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message ATT Force Regen Active
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS

Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI ATT Inhib Regen Active
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message ATT Inhib Regen Active
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS

Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Display Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Display Fail
Alarm evaluated
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued if communication with display is interrupted or lost.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 587

DRAFT!

Wrn Default Credentials

Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Default Credentials
Alarm evaluated
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm is issued if the factory default password and/or access code are used
Description and engine is running. Factory default password and access code are "0".
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI Dual Operation Fail
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Fail
Alarm evaluated Only during dual operation
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is active when there is fail between controllers in dual operation
function.
Example:
No connection – disconnection of cable
No connection – incorrect settings of COM Modes
Controllers not in AUTO mode
Description
Different Operation Modes (AMF controllers only)
Different FW versions in controllers
Different mains statuses in controllers (AMF controllers only)

Note: This alarm is also written to history.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Dual Operation Different FW Version
Alarm Type ProtALI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Different FW Version
Alarm evaluated Only during dual operation
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is active when FW version (all numbers are checked) or Branch of
Description Master and Slave is different.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 588

DRAFT!

WRN Dual Operation Master Fail

Alarm Type ProtAHI, WRN
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Master Fail
Alarm evaluated Only during dual operation
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is active when Master is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
2nd level on Master. Logical binary output AL DUAL MASTER FAIL (PAGE 1) is
activated.
Description
Note: This alarm is also written to history.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI Dual Operation Slave Fail
Alarm Type ProtAHI, WRN
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Slave Fail
Alarm evaluated Only during dual operation
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is active when Slave is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
2nd level on Slave. Logical binary output AL DUAL SLAVE FAIL (PAGE 1) is
activated.
Description
Note: This alarm is also written to history.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI Dual Operation Different Mains
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Different Mains
Alarm evaluated Only during dual operation
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is active when there are different states of mains on controllers. For
example Master see healthy mains and slave see mains fail.
Description Note: This alarm is also written to history.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AL Transferring Fuel
Alarm Type ProtALI
Alarmlist message Transferring Fuel
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 589

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm is issued if FUEL PUMP (PAGE 509) is active.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AL Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm evaluated When FUEL PUMP (PAGE 509) is active
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm will occur when there is no increase of fuel level when FUEL PUMP
Description (PAGE 509) is active.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm evaluated
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if the engine is running and the voltage on the D+ terminal is
lower than D+ Threshold (page 248) of the controller supply voltage. This alarm
Description works similar to the red "battery" alarm indicator on a vehicle dashboard. The
setpoint has to be in Charge Fail or Enabled position to enable this alarm.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Wrn Stop Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Stop Fail
Alarm evaluated While the engine shall be stopped

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 590

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm occurs if the Gen-set shall be stopped, but some symptom indicates
that it is not stopped. The period when the Gen-set shall be stopped begins after the
FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 509) has been switched off and time delay Stop Time
(page 244) has elapsed and lasts for the entire time the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
509) or STARTER 1 (PAGE 536) are off.

Description

Image 8.117 Stop Fail

Note: Gen-set cannot be started until this alarm is inactive and reset.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance 1
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Adjust the setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 (page 260) to the interval of the next
maintenance check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is
running and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. The alarm message will
Description remain in the alarm list (even if the controller is switched off and on again) until the
setpoint is re-adjusted to a positive value.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance 2
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance 2
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 591

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

Adjust the setpoint Maintenance Timer 2 (page 260) to the interval of the next
maintenance check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is
running and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. The alarm message will
Description remain in the alarm list (even if the controller is switched off and on again) until the
setpoint is re-adjusted to a positive value.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance 3
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance 3
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Adjust the setpoint Maintenance Timer 3 (page 260) to the interval of the next
maintenance check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is
running and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. The alarm message will
Description remain in the alarm list (even if the controller is switched off and on again) until the
setpoint is re-adjusted to a positive value.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn MCB Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn MCB Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 592

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm will occur when the MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 484) input does not match
the expected position given by the MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 523) output. It stays
active until the mismatch between the output and feedback disappears.
If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
(feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be issued
immediately.
Self-opening of the breaker is not considered a fault and if all mains values
are within limits, the command to reclose the breaker is issued after delay
Description given by the setpoint Mains Return Delay (page 279) has elapsed.
The alarm will be also issued, if the breaker does not respond to the close
command within 2 seconds. After this period has elapsed the output MCB
Close/Open is deactivated again and the next attempt to close the breaker
will occur first after the alarm is reset.
The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to the open
command within 2 seconds. The output MCB Close/Open will stay
deactivated. Closing of GCB is blocked until this alarm becomes inactive.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 268)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 268)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 593

DRAFT!

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 268)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 268)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2L3 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L2L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 268)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L3L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 594

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 268)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 595

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2L3 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L2L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L3L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 596

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator Overfrequency
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator > Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator overfrequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 271)

Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 272)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator Uderfrequency
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator < Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator underfrequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 271)

Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 272)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 597

DRAFT!

Wrn Overload
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Overload
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm is issued when the Gen-setmains power is over the limit for time period
longer than the delay. The following setpoints are related to it:
Overload Wrn (page 264) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload BOC (page 263) Overload Del adjusts the delay.
Description
Overload Wrn (page 1) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload MPRBOR (page 1)Overload MPRBOR (page 1) Overload Del
adjusts the delay.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Battery Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message All the time
Alarm evaluated Wrn Battery > Voltage
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is too high. The
following setpoints are related to it:

Description Battery Overvoltage (page 258)

Battery <> Voltage Delay (page 258)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 5 (PAGE 567).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Battery Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Battery < Voltage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is too low. The
following setpoints are related to it:

Description Battery Undervoltage (page 257)

Battery <> Voltage Delay (page 258)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 5 (PAGE 567).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 598

DRAFT!

Wrn Coolant Temperature Low

Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Coolant Temperature Low
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the coolant temperature is lower than the temperature set
Description
in Coolant Temperature Low Wrn (page 1) setpoint.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Battery Charger Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Battery Charge Fail
Alarm evaluated Mains is OK
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is activated when logical binary input BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 475) is
Description active.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Manual Restore
Alarm Type ProtALI
Alarmlist message Manual Restore
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Alarm is activated when controller is in AUTO mode, Return From Island (page
Description 288) setpoint is set to manual, load is on Gen-set and mains has returned.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Override All Sd
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Override All Sd
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when binary input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 490) is activated.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Production Mode
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 599

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

Description

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Brute Force Protection Active
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Rental Timer 1
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Rental Timer 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs xx hours before Rental Timer 1 (page 351) elapsed. Hours are
Description adjusted by setpoint Rental Timer 1 Wrn (page 353).
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Rental Timer 2
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Rental Timer 2
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs xx hours before Rental Timer 2 (page 353) elapsed. Hours are
Description adjusted by setpoint Rental Timer 2 Wrn (page 355).
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 1
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 1 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 600

DRAFT!

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 2
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 2
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 2 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 3
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 3
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 3 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 4
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 4
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 4 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 5
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 5
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 5 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 6
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 6
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 6 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 601

DRAFT!

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 7
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 7
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 7 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 8
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 8
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 8 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 9
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 9
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 9 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 10
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 10
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 10 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 11
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 11
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 11 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 602

DRAFT!

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 12
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 12
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 12 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 13
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 13
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 13 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 14
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 14
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 14 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 15
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 15 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/Hist.msg. 16
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/Hist.msg. 16
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 16 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 603

DRAFT!

AL Fuel Transfer Failed

Alarm Type ProtALI
Alarmlist message Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS

Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI Rental Timer 1 Elapsed
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message Rental Timer 1 Elapsed
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is activated when Rental Timer 1 (page 351) elapses.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI Rental Timer 2 Elapsed
Alarm Type ProtAHI
Alarmlist message Rental Timer 2 Elapsed
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is activated when Rental Timer 2 (page 353) elapses.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if generator phases are wired in wrong order.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Mains Ph L1 Inverted
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 604

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm is issued if mains phase L1 is inverted.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Mains Ph L2 Inverted
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Mains Ph L2 Inverted
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if mains phase L2 is inverted.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Mains Ph L3 Inverted
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Mains Ph L3 Inverted
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if mains phase L3 is inverted.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Mains Ph Rotation Opposite
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if mains phases are wired in wrong order.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-n
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-n
Alarm evaluated

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 605

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm is issued depending on evaluation of the unbalance of the phase
voltages, i.e. the difference between highest and lowest phase voltage at any
given time. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 270) adjusts the maximum allowed
difference between the highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time.
Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay (page 270) adjusts the alarm delay.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-ph
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message Mains Voltage Unbalance ph-ph
Alarm evaluated
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued depending on evaluation of the unbalance of the phase to
phase voltages, i.e. the difference between highest and lowest phase to phase
voltage at any given time. The following setpoints are related to it:

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Mains Overfrequency
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message Mains Overfrequency
Alarm evaluated
Related applications AMF, MRS

Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Mains Underfrequency
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message Mains Underfrequency
Alarm evaluated
Related applications AMF, MRS

Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 606

DRAFT!

Wrn Rental Timer Block Start

Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Rental Timer Block Start
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Alarm is active when there is start command and Rental Timer 1 (page 351)
Description or Rental Timer 2 (page 353) elapsed.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Mains Voltage Detected
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Mains Voltage Detected
Alarm evaluated Gen-set is running
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when setpoint Default Application Select (page 220) is
Description adjusted to MRS and voltage is detected on mains.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of Gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 356)
Fence 1 Protection (page 358)
Fence Radius 1 (page 358)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of Gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 356)
Fence 2 Protection (page 359)
Fence Radius 2 (page 360)

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 607

DRAFT!

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Fuel Theft
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Theft
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when the fuel level value measured at relevant AI (Fuel Level)
Description drops faster than is the limit adjusted by setpoint Maximal Fuel Drop (page 252).
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance 4
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance 4
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Adjust the setpoint Maintenance Timer 4 (page 261) to the interval of the next
maintenance check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is
running and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. The alarm message will
Description remain in the alarm list (even if the controller is switched off and on again) until the
setpoint is re-adjusted to a positive value.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance 5
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance 5
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Adjust the setpoint Maintenance Timer 5 (page 261) to the interval of the next
maintenance check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is
running and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. The alarm message will
Description remain in the alarm list (even if the controller is switched off and on again) until the
setpoint is re-adjusted to a positive value.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 608

DRAFT!

Wrn Maintenance 6
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance 6
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Adjust the setpoint Maintenance Timer 6 (page 262) to the interval of the next
maintenance check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is
running and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. The alarm message will
Description remain in the alarm list (even if the controller is switched off and on again) until the
setpoint is re-adjusted to a positive value.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 5 (PAGE 567).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

8.2.3 Alarms level 2

What alarms level 2 are:
The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached.

List of alarms level 2

Sd Module: Slot 1 611
Sd Module: Slot 2 611
Sd Module: Slot 3 611
Sd Module: Slot 4 612
Sd Module: Slot 5 612
Sd Module(slotA) - false module 612
Sd Module(slotB) - false module 612
Sd Module(slotA) - unknown module 613
Sd Module(slotB) - unknown module 613
Sd Module(slotA) - unattended 613
Sd Module(slotB) - unattended 613
Sd Module(slotA) - comm. outage 613
Sd Module(slotB) - comm. outage 614
Sd Module(slotA) - unexpected 614
Sd Module(slotB) - unexpected 614
Sd EM(A) - a message lost 614
Sd EM(B) - a message lost 615
Sd EM(A) - configuration mistake 615
Sd EM(B) - configuration mistake 615
Sd EM(A) - insufficient 615
Sd EM(B) - insufficient 615
Sd EM(A) - missing or damaged 616

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 609

DRAFT!

Sd EM(B) - missing or damaged 616

Sd ECU Communication Fail 616
Sd Emergency Stop 616
Sd E-Stop 617
Sd Overspeed 617
Sd Underspeed 617
Sd RPM Measurement Fail 618
Sd Battery Flat 618
Sd Start Fail 618
Sd GCB Fail 619
Sd Generator L1 Overvoltage 619
Sd Generator L2 Overvoltage 619
Sd Generator L3 Overvoltage 620
Sd Generator L1L2 Overvoltage 620
Sd Generator L2L3 Overvoltage 620
Sd Generator L3L1 Overvoltage 620
BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage 621
BOC Generator L2 Undervoltage 621
BOC Generator L3 Undervoltage 621
BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage 622
BOC Generator L2L3 Undervoltage 622
BOC Generator L3L1 Undervoltage 622
BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage 623
BOC Generator L2 Undervoltage 623
BOC Generator L3 Undervoltage 623
BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage 624
BOC Generator L2L3 Undervoltage 624
BOC Generator L3L1 Undervoltage 624
BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph 625
BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-N 625
BOC Generator Overfrequency 625
BOC Generator Underfrequency 626
BOC Reverse Power 631
BOC Current Unbalance 631
BOC Overload 632
BOC Short Circuit 632
Sd Earth Fault Current 632
BOC Overcurrent IDMT 633
BOC Rental Timer 1 Exceeded 633
BOC Rental Timer 2 Exceeded 633

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 610

DRAFT!

Sd Fence 1 Alarm 634

BOC Fence 1 Alarm 634
Sd Fence 2 Alarm 634
BOC Fence 2 Alarm 634
Sd Parallel Work 635

6 back to Alarms
Sd Module: Slot 1
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with preconfigured
Description module 1.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module: Slot 2
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 2
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with preconfigured
Description module 2.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module: Slot 3
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 3
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with preconfigured
Description module 3.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 611

DRAFT!

Sd Module: Slot 4
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 4
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with preconfigured
Description module 4.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module: Slot 5
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 5
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with preconfigured
Description module 5.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module(slotA) - false module
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - fake module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module(slotB) - false module
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - fake module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 612

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 615

DRAFT!

Sd EM(A) - missing or damaged

Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(A) - missing or damaged
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in slot
Description
(in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in slot).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd EM(B) - missing or damaged
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(B) - missing or damaged
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in slot
Description
(if first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in slot).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd ECU Communication Fail
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd ECU Communication Fail
With configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) – only when this LBO is
Alarm evaluated active
Without configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 506) – all the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU is not established or has dropped out.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Emergency Stop
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Emergency Stop
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
Alarm is activated when binary input EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 479) is activated.
The Gen-set shuts down in the moment the input is activated and starting is
blocked until the input is deactivated and fault reset is pressed.
Note: Use red emergency button placed on the switchboard door and connect
Description it to a binary input of the controller. Then configure the function Emergency
Stop to this binary input. It is recommended to use NC contact of the button.

Note: The MCB control is not affected by this alarm.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 616

DRAFT!

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd E-Stop
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Emergency Stop
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS

Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 5 (PAGE 567).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm evaluated Engine running only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if the engine is running and the voltage on the D+ terminal is
lower than 80%D+ Threshold (page 248) of the controller supply voltage. This
Description alarm works similar to the red “battery” alarm indicator on a vehicle dashboard.
The setpoint has to be in Charge Fail or Enabled position to enable this alarm.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Sd Overspeed
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Overspeed
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm occurs immediately when the engine speed has exceeded the limit. The
behavior of the overspeed alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
Overspeed Sd (page 249) adjust the overspeed limit

Description Overspeed Overshot (page 1) adjust the additional overspeed limit

Overspeed Overshot Period (page 1) adjust the time period of additional
overspeed limit
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Underspeed
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Underspeed
Alarm evaluated Engine running only

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 617

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm will be issued when the Gen-set is running and then stops by itself, i.e.
the RPM drops under the value of setpoint Underspeed Sd (page 251).
Description The underspeed alarm starts to be evaluated after successful Gen-set start and is
being evaluated for the entire time that the fuel solenoid is on.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd RPM Measurement Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd RPM Measurement Fail
Alarm evaluated During cranking
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm is issued if the engine speed has not exceeded the Starting RPM (page
232) within the Maximum Cranking Time (page 231), although some of
Description additional running engine indication sources indicate that the engine has started.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Battery Flat
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Battery Flat
Alarm evaluated During cranking
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm will be issued if the controller was reset during cranking of the gen-set.
If this situation occurs, the controller supposes the starting battery is so exhausted
Description that its voltage drops so low when starter motor is energized that it causes
controller reset.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Start Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Start Fail
Alarm evaluated When the gen-set is being started
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm will be issued after all attempts to start the gen-set have run out but the
Gen-set did not start. The following setpoints are related to this alarm:
Description
Cranking Attempts (page 231) adjust the number of attempts

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 563).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 618

DRAFT!

Sd GCB Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd GCB Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm will occur when the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 481) input does not match
the expected position given by the GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 511) output. It stays
active until the mismatch between the output and feedback persists.
If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
Description (feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be issued
immediately.
The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to an open or
close command within 2 seconds.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 268)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 268)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 619

DRAFT!

Sd Generator L3 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 268)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L1L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 268)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L2L3 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 268)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L3L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 620

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 268)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L3 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 621

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L2L3 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L3L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 622

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L3 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 623

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L2L3 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L2L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2 and
3. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L3L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L3L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 624

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3 and
1. The following setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 269)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance ph-ph
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase to phase voltages, i.e. the
difference between highest and lowest phase to phase voltage at any given time.
The following setpoints are related to it:

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-N
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance ph-n
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase voltages, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator Overfrequency
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator > Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 625

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 270)

Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 272)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator Underfrequency
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator < Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 271)

Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 269)

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 564).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Mains L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message No
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases. The following setpoints
are related to it:
Mains Overvoltage (page 282)
Mains <> Voltage Delay (page 283)
Description
Note: Alarm is active only in case the setpoint Connection type (page 211) is
set to 3Ph4Wire or MonoPhase.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Mains L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message No
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 626

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases. The following setpoints
are related to it:
Mains Undervoltage (page 283)
Mains <> Voltage Delay (page 283)
Description
Note: Alarm is active only in case the setpoint Connection type (page 211) is
set to 3Ph4Wire or MonoPhase.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Mains L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message No
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases. The following setpoints
are related to it:
Mains Overvoltage (page 282)
Mains <> Voltage Delay (page 283)
Description
Note: Alarm is active only in case the setpoint Connection type (page 211) is
set to 3Ph4Wire.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Mains L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message No
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases. The following setpoints
are related to it:
Mains Overvoltage (page 282)
Mains <> Voltage Delay (page 283)
Description
Note: Alarm is active only in case the setpoint Connection type (page 211) is
set to 3Ph4Wire.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 627

DRAFT!

Mains L3 Overvoltage
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message No
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases. The following setpoints
are related to it:
Mains Overvoltage (page 282)
Mains <> Voltage Delay (page 283)
Description
Note: Alarm is active only in case the setpoint Connection type (page 211) is
set to 3Ph4Wire.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Mains L1L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message No
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases L1 and L2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Mains Overvoltage (page 282)
Mains <> Voltage Delay (page 283)
Description
Note: Alarm is active only in case the setpoint Connection type (page 211) is
set to 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 628

DRAFT!

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Mains L1L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message No
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases L1 and L2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Mains Overvoltage (page 282)
Mains <> Voltage Delay (page 283)
Description
Note: Alarm is active only in case the setpoint Connection type (page 211) is
set to 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Mains L2L3 Overvoltage
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message No
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases L2 and L3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Mains Overvoltage (page 282)
Mains <> Voltage Delay (page 283)
Description
Note: Alarm is active only in case the setpoint Connection type (page 211) is
set to 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Mains L2L3 Undervoltage
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message No
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 629

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases L2 and L3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Mains Overvoltage (page 282)
Mains <> Voltage Delay (page 283)
Description
Note: Alarm is active only in case the setpoint Connection type (page 211) is
set to 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Mains L3L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message No
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases L3 and L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Mains Overvoltage (page 282)
Mains <> Voltage Delay (page 283)
Description
Note: Alarm is active only in case the setpoint Connection type (page 211) is
set to 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or SplitPhase.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Mains L3L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message No
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases L3 and L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Mains Overvoltage (page 282)
Mains <> Voltage Delay (page 283)
Description
Note: Alarm is active only in case the setpoint Connection type (page 211) is
set to 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or SplitPhase.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 630

DRAFT!

Mains Overfrequency
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message No
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases 1. The following setpoints
are related to it:
Description
Mains Overfrequency (page 286)
Mains < > Frequency Delay (page 1)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Mains Underfrequency
Alarm Type ProtMP
Alarmlist message No
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the Mains phase voltage in phases 1. The following setpoints
are related to it:
Description
Mains Underfrequency (page 287)
Mains < > Frequency Delay (page 1)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

BOC Reverse Power
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Reverse Power
Alarm evaluated Gen-set is running
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm is issued when the level of active power (-kW) gets under limit given by
setpoint Reverse Power Level (page 272) for time longer than the value of
Description setpoint Reverse Power Delay (page 272).
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Current Unbalance
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Current Unbalance
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 631

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase currents, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase current at any given time. The following
setpoints are related to it:

Description Current Unbalance BOC (page 267) adjusts the maximum allowed
difference between the highest and lowest phase current at any given time.
Current Unbalance BOC Delay (page 267) adjusts the alarm delay.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 565).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Overload
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Overload
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
The alarm is issued when the gen-set power is over the limit for time period longer
than the delay. The behavior of the overload alarm is adjusted by the following
setpoints:
Description Overload BOC (page 263) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 264) adjusts the delay

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Short Circuit
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Short Circuit
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This is a fast overcurrent protection. The following setpoints are related to this
alarm:

Description Short Circuit BOC (page 264) adjusts the short current limit
Short Circuit BOC Delay (page 265) adjusts the delay in fine steps

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Earth Fault Current
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Earth Fault Current
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 632

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm indicates that the value of earth fault current is higher than adjusted
limit. The following setpoints are related to it:
Earth Fault Sd (page 381) adjusts the maximum allowed earth fault
Description current.
Earth Fault Delay (page 380) adjusts the alarm delay.

Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Overcurrent IDMT
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd + Name of binary input
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if IDMT protection is activated due to over-crossing the IDMT
curve set by setpoints IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page 265).
The behaviour of the overcurrent alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page 265) defines the reaction time of the
Description
protection when the current is twice the amount of nominal value.
Nominal Current (page 209) set the nominal current level, where the
alarm starts to be evaluated. The reaction time is infinite at this point.
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Rental Timer 1 Exceeded
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Rental Timer 1 Exceeded
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if Rental Timer 1 BOC will timer elapse.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Rental Timer 2 Exceeded
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Rental Timer 2 Exceeded
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm is issued if Rental Timer 2 BOC will timer elapse.
Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 566).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 633

DRAFT!

Sd Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 356)
Fence 1 Protection (page 358)
Fence Radius 1 (page 358)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 356)
Fence 1 Protection (page 358)
Fence Radius 1 (page 358)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 356)
Fence 1 Protection (page 358)
Fence Radius 1 (page 358)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 634

DRAFT!

Related applications AMF, MRS

This alarm evaluates the GPS position of gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 356)
Fence 1 Protection (page 358)
Fence Radius 1 (page 358)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Parallel Work
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Parallel Work
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS

Description
Note: This alarm has FPS – FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 5 (PAGE 567).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

8.2.4 Fail sensor and other types

What Fail sensor and other types of alarms are
If the measured resistance on an analog input exceeds the valid range, a sensor fail will be detected and a
sensor fail message will appear in the Alarmlist.

List of fail sensor

Fls AIN Prot 1 635
Fls Coolant Temp 636
Fls Fuel Level 636
Fls Oil Pressure 636

6 back to Alarms
Fls AIN Prot 1
Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls + name of analog input 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications AMF, MRS
This alarm indicates that the value of general analog protection is out of range or is
Description
missing.

6 back to List of fail sensor

Note: Controller has 2 plug-in module slots.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 636

DRAFT!

Supported combinations of plug-in modules

Module CM-Ethernet CM-4G-GPS CM-RS232-485 EM-BIO8-EFCP

CM-Ethernet

CM-4G-GPS

CM-GPRS

CM-RS232-485

EM-BIO8-EFCP

Communication modules
CM-RS232-485 637
CM-Ethernet 639
CM-4G-GPS 641

CM-RS232-485
CM-RS232-485 is optional plug-in card to enable InteliLite 4 the RS232 and RS485 communication. This is
required for computer or Modbus connection. The CM-RS232-485 is a dual port module with RS232 and RS485
interfaces at independent COM channels. The RS232 is connected to COM1 and RS485 to COM2.

Image 8.118 CM-RS232-485 interface

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 637

DRAFT!

Image 8.119 Pinout of RS232 line

Image 8.120 Pinout of RS485 line

Image 8.121 Jumpers description

Note: Balancing resistors shall be both closed at only one device in whole RS485 network.

Maximal distance of line is 10 m for RS232 line and 1200 m for RS485 line.
Terminator 120 Ω
Balancing resistor +5 V

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 638

DRAFT!

Technical data
40 mA / 8 VDC
26 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
14 mA / 24 VDC
10 mA / 36 VDC
Isolation Galvanic separation

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware
you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.

CM-Ethernet
CM-Ethernet is a plug-in card with Ethernet 10/100 Mbit interface in RJ45 connector. It provides an interface for
connecting a PC with through ethernet/internet network, for sending active e-mails and for integration of the
controller into a building management (MODBUS TCP and SNMP protocols). This card also enables to monitor
and control the gen-set over web browser from any location with internet access using appropriate security
measures.

Image 8.122 CM-Ethernet interface

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

Use an Ethernet UTP cable with a RJ45 connector for linking the module with your Ethernet network. The
module can also be connected directly to a PC using cross-wired UTP cable.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 639

DRAFT!

Image 8.123 Cross-wired cable

Technical data
120 mA / 8 VDC
82 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
35 mA / 24 VDC
25 mA / 36 VDC

Module setup
All settings related to the module are to be adjusted via the controller setpoints. The respective setpoints are
located in the setpoint Group: CM-Ethernet (page 1).
All actual operational values like actual IP address etc. are available in controller values in a specific group as
well.

Status LED
Blinking frequency Color
Green – everything is OK
Red – some of following errors occurred:
1 Hz unplugged Ethernet cable
module cannot connect to AirGate
module can not obtain IP address from DHCP
Green – firmware is currently being programmed
10 Hz
Red – no firmware present in the module

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 640

DRAFT!

Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware
you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.

CM-4G-GPS
CM-4G-GPS plug-in module containing a GPS receiver and GSM/WCDMA/LTE modem which can works in
two modes of operation based on the settings in the setpoint Internet Connection (page 361).

Image 8.124 CM-4G-GPS module

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

IMPORTANT: CM-4G-GPS and CM-GPRS modules cant be used in one controller in the same time.

IMPORTANT: Operating temperature of module is from -30 °C to +75 °C.

Note: Cellular data service must be enabled in your SIM card by your mobile operator for successful operation.

CM-4G-GPS module works with:

WebSupervisor – internet-based remote monitoring solution
AirGate – powerful connection technology to make internet access as simple as possible
CM-4G-GPS module also works like GPS locator. Geo-fencing function can be used with this module.
Supported 4G bands are as follows:
FDD LTE: Band 1, Band 2, Band 3, Band 4, Band 5, Band 7, Band 8, Band 20, all bands with diversity
WCDMA/HSDPA/HSUPA/HSPA+: Band 1, Band 2, Band 5, Band 8, all bands with diversity
GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850 MHz/900 MHz/1800 MHz/1900 MHz

Technical data
55 mA / 8 VDC
35 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
8 mA / 24 VDC
5 mA / 36 VDC

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 641

DRAFT!

SIM card settings

SIM card to be used in CM-4G-GPS or CM-GPRS modules must be adjusted as follows:
SMS service enabled
Packet data (Internet access) enabled (when required for the selected mode of operation)
PIN code security disabled

How to start using CM-4G-GPS module

You will need a controller, CM-4G-GPS module, antenna and SIM card with SMS and packet data service.

Note: Make sure that your SIM supports the packet data network type you want to use. – i.e. if you want to use
the module in LTE (4G) network you have to confirm with the operator that the particular SIM card supports 4G
network.

Contact your mobile operator for getting packet data APN (APN = Access Point Name), username and
password.
Example: APN Name = "internet", UserName = [blank], Password = [blank].

Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. Use any mobile phone to switch the SIM PIN security off.
Place the SIM card into slot on CM-4G-GPS card
Connect the antenna to Cellular module antenna connector.
If you want to use the built-in GPS receiver connect also an active GPS antenna to the GPS antenna
connector.
Switch off the controller.
Insert CM-4G-GPS module into controller
Power up the controller.
Select the mode of CM-4G-GPS module by adjusting setpointModeInternet Connection (page 361).
Enter correct APN Name, APN User Name and APN User Password in controller’s setpoint group CM-4G-
GPS which is accessible by PAGE button from any measurement screen on controller. Setpoints can be set
on controller’s front panel keyboard or by InteliConfig.
Switch the controller off and on.
Wait for approx 2 - 4 minutes for first connection of the system to AirGate. AirGate will generate
automatically the AirGate ID value. Then navigate to measurement screens where you will find signal
strength bar and AirGate ID identifier.

Image 8.125 Main screen of CM-4G-GPS module

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 642

DRAFT!

Image 8.126 Screen of AirGate

GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules

GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
1 Not possible to hang up.
2 Modul is switched off
3 Module is switched on
4 Module – error in initialization
5 Module – not possible to set the APN
6 Module – not possible to connect to GPRS network
7 Module – not possible to retrieve IP address
8 Module – not accepted DNS IP address
9 Error in modem detection
10 Error in initialization of analog modem
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or unknown
11
status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
13 Not possible to read the SIM card parameters
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by locked
14
SIM card
15 Unknown modem
16 Bad answer to complement initialization string
17 Not possible to read GSM signal strength
18 CDMA modem not detected
19 No CDMA network
20 Unsuccessful registration to CDMA network
21 SIMCom/ME909s: can´t read FW version
22 SIMCom: GSM signal not found
23 SIMCom: can´t detect module speed

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 643

DRAFT!

24 SIMCom: HW reset issued

25 PUK is required
26 Error of SIM card detected
27 ME909s: can't set module bps
28 ME909s: can't set link configuration
29 ME909s: can't do power-off
30 ME909s: can't do power-on
31 ME909s: can't do hardware reset
32 ME909s: ME909s not started
33 ME909s: switch off issued
34 ME909s: switch on issued
35 ME909s: HW reset issued
36 ME909s: can't switch echo off
37 ME909s: can't find out state of registration
38 ME909s: GSM signal not found
39 ME909s: no SIM memory for SMS
40 ME909s: waiting for registration
41 Can't read operator name
42 ME909s: can't set flow control
43 APN not typed
255 Only running communication is needed to indicate

AirGate Diag – Diagnostic Code for AirGate connection

Code Description
0 Waiting for connection to AirGate Server
1 Controller registered, waiting for authorization
2 Not possible to register, controller blacklisted
3 Not possible to register, server has no more capacity
4 Not possible to register, other reason
5 Controller registered and authorized

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 644

DRAFT!

The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.

Extension modules
EM-BIO8-EFCP 645

EM-BIO8-EFCP
EM-BIO8-EFCP is optional plug-in card. Through this card controller can accommodate one AC current (CT)
measuring input (1A or 5A input) and up to 8 binary inputs or outputs. In InteliConfig PC configuration tool it is
possible to easily choose if particular I/O will be binary input or output.

Image 8.127 EM-BIO8-EFCP interface

Note: This protection is active ONLY when Engine is running.

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

IMPORTANT: Earth fault current measurement is supported by controller only in slot A.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 645

DRAFT!

Image 8.128 Overview of EM-BIO8-EFCP

Note: Current inputs are supported only in MRS 16 and AMF 25 controllers.

Image 8.129 EM-BIO8-EFCP wiring

Note: There is a possibility to contact directly to binary input terminals.

Note: Current inputs are supported only in MRS 16 and AMF 25 controllers.

EM-BIO8-EFCP technical data

Power supply
Power supply range 8-36 VDC
40 mA / 8 VDC
27 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
22 mA / 24 VDC
19 mA / 36 VDC

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 646

DRAFT!

Binary inputs
Number Up to 8, non-isolated
Close/Open 0-2 VDC close contact
indication >6 VDC open contact

Binary outputs
Number Up to 8 , non-isolated
Max. current 0,5A
Switching to positive supply terminal

Current measuring input

Number of inputs 2
Nominal input current 1A/5A
Load (CT output impedance) < 0,1
Max measured current from
10 A
CT
Current measurement
2% from Nominal current
tolerance
Max peak current from CT 150 A / 1 s
Max continuous current 10 A

Earth fault current measurement

The Earth Fault protection is done by the extension module EM-BIO8-EFCP.
When the measured current exceeds the set value, which indicates that part of the current is dispersed to earth,
and when the set Earth Fault Delay (page 380) time elapses, the Earth Fault Current Protection (page
379), Sd Earth Fault Current (page 632) alarm and AL EARTH FAULT (PAGE 1) output are activated. Earth
Fault protection is not active when gen-set does not run and when the Earth Fault Current Protection (page
379) is disabled.
IMPORTANT: Earth fault current measurement is not intended to protect human health, but the
device!

Image 8.130 Earth fault current protection

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 647

DRAFT!

8.3.2 CAN modules

The available extension CAN modules are:
Inteli AIN8 – extension CAN module with 8 analog inputs
Inteli IO8/8 – extension CAN module with 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
this CAN module can be switched to Inteli IO16/0 – extension CAN module with 16 binary inputs and 2
analog outputs

Supported combinations of modules

Inteli Inteli Inteli IGS- Inteli
Slot Inteli AIN8 IGL-RA15
AIN8TC IO8/8 IO16/0 PTM AIO9/1

IMPORTANT: In slot 3, 4 and 5 CAN modules Inteli IO8/8 and Inteli IO16/0 are supported without
analog outputs. Analog outputs of these CAN modules are supported only in slot 1 and 2.

It is possible to add up to 80 binary inputs or up to 68 binary outputs or up to 32 analog inputs on CAN modules.

Extension modules
Inteli AIN8 649
Inteli IO8/8 654
IGS-PTM 661
Inteli AIN8TC 667
Inteli AIO9/1 671

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 648

DRAFT!

IGL-RA15 676

Inteli AIN8
Inteli AIN8 module is extension module equipped with analog inputs. Inteli AIN8 module is connected to
controller by CAN1 bus.

Image 8.131 Inteli AIN8

Image 8.132 Inteli AIN8 dimensions

Note: All dimensions are in mm.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 649

9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn't start – after 60 second the "Timeout" will be evaluated. In
this case please check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blinking)
12. Module FW is upgraded

LED indication

LED status Description

Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn't communicate with the controller).

Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.
Terminator

Resistance sensor - 3 wires

Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0-2400 Ω, 0-10 kΩ

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 652

DRAFT!

Resistance sensor – 2 wires

Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0-2400 Ω, 0-10 kΩ

Current sensor - active

Note: Ranges: ±20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

Current sensor - passive

Note: Ranges: 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 653

DRAFT!

Voltage sensor

Note: Ranges: ±1 V, 0 – 2,5 V, 0 – 5 V, 0 – 10 V

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature -40 °C to +80 °C
Operating temperature -30 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3" × 4.3" × 1.8")
Weight 221.5 grams

Analog inputs
Number of channels 8
Range 0-10 V
Voltage
Accuracy: ±0.25 % of actual value + ±25 mV
Range: ±20 mA
Current
Accuracy: ±0.25 % of actual value + ±50 µA
Range: 0- 10 kΩ
Resistive
Accuracy: ±0.5 % of actual value + ±2 Ω

Inteli IO8/8
Inteli IO8/8 module is an extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs and analog outputs.
Inteli IO8/8 is the name of the module, but it is possible to configure the module (by internal switch) to two
configurations:
Inteli IO8/8 – 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
Inteli IO16/0 – 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
The detection of communication speed is indicated by fast flashing of status LED. Once the speed is detected
the module remains set for the speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of communication speed
detection is done by reset of the module.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 654

DRAFT!

Image 8.133 Inteli IO8/8

Image 8.134 Inteli IO8/8 dimensions

Note: All dimensions are in mm.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 655

DRAFT!

Terminals

Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 659

DRAFT!

Binary outputs – high side

When high side setting of outputs is chosen – binary output must be connected to the minus potential directly
Terminal VHS (voltage High side) has to be connected to positive potential directly. Maximal current of each
binary output is 500 mA. Size of fuse depends on load.
Binary outputs – low side

When low side setting of outputs is chosen – binary output must be connected to the plus potential of power
supply directly. Minus potential is connected internally – dashed line.
Analog outputs

Note: Limit of analog ground (AGND) is 100mA.

IMPORTANT: Terminator for analog output has special analog ground (AGND), which must not be
connected to the GND.

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature -40 °C to +80 °C

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 660

DRAFT!

Operating temperature -30 °C to +70 °C

Dimensions (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)
Weight 240 grams

Analog outputs
Number of channels 2
Range 0-10 V
Voltage Accuracy: ±20 mV + ±0.5 % of actual value
Imax 5 mA
Range: 0-20 mA
Current Accuracy: ±100 µA + ±0.5 % of actual value
Rmax 500 Ω
Level 5 V
PWM Frequency – adjustable 200÷2400 Hz
Imax 20 mA

Binary inputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 16 for Inteli IO16/0
Input resistance 4400 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for open contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for close contact indication 6 to 36 V DC

Binary outputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 0 for Inteli IO16/0
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC

IGS-PTM
IGS-PTM module is extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs, analog inputs and analog
output. IGS-PTM module is connected to controller by CAN1 bus.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 661

DRAFT!

Image 8.135 IGS-PTM

Image 8.136 IGS-PTM dimensions

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 662

DRAFT!

Terminals

Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Analog inputs 4 analog inputs
Analog outputs 1 analog output
Binary outputs 8 binary outputs
CAN CAN1 line
RS232-TTL Interface for programming
Power Power supply

Analog inputs
Analog inputs can be configured for:
Resistance measurement
Current measurement
Voltage measurement
The type of analog inputs is configured via jumpers RUI located on lower PCB.

RUI Analog input configuration

1-2 Resistance measuring
2-3 Current measuring
no jumper Voltage measuring

Supported sensors

Sensors
PT100 [°C] (fix) User curves
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-100 mV
PT100 [°F] (fix) 0-2400 Ω
NI100 [°F] (fix) ±20 mA

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 663

DRAFT!

CAN address
Controller type selection
The type of controller to be used with IGS-PTM must be selected via jumper labeled IGS accessible at the lower
PCB.

IGS jumper Controller type

OPEN IL-NT, IC-NT
CLOSE IG-NT, IS-NT, InteliLite

Address configuration
If InteliLite controller type is selected (by IGS jumper), address of IGS-PTM could be modified via jumpers
labeled ADR1 and ADR2.

ADR1 ADR2 ADR offset BIN module BOUT module AIN module
Open Open 0 (default) 1 1 1
Close Open 1 2 2 2
Open Close 2 3 3 3
Close Close 3 4 4 4

Programing firmware
Firmware upgrade is via AT-link (TTL). For programming is necessary to close jumper BOOT. RESET jumper is
used to reset the device. Close jumper to reset the device. For programming is used FlashProg PC tool.

LED status Description

Dark No required power connected.
Quick flashing Program check failure.
One flash and pause Compensation fail.
Three flashes and
Compensation successful.
pause
Flashes There is no communication between IGS-PTM and the controller.
Power supply is in the range and communication between IGS-PTM and controller
Lights
properly works.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 664

DRAFT!

Wiring
Binary inputs

Binary outputs

Resistance sensor

Note: Range: 0-2400 Ω

IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-250 Ω. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is

necessary to chose 0-2400 Ω sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.

Voltage sensor

Note: Range 0-100 mV

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 665

DRAFT!

Current sensor – passive

Note: Range: ±0-20 mA

IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-20 mA. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is
necessary to chose ±20 mA active sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.

Analog outputs

Note: Range: 0 to 20 mA ±0.33 mA

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 100 mA at 24V ÷ 500 mA
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature -40 °C to +80 °C
Operating temperature -30 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 95 × 96 × 43 mm (3.7" × 3.8" × 1.7")

Analog inputs
Number of channels 8
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1.5 % ±1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ±0.5 Ω out of measured value
Range: 0-250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ±2 Ω out of measured value

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 666

DRAFT!

Analog outputs
Number of channels 1
Range: 0 to 20 mA ± 0.33 mA
Current
Resolution 10 bit

Binary inputs
Number of channels 8
Input resistance 4700 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for open contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for close contact indication 8 to 36 V DC

Binary outputs
Number of channels 8
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC
Number of channels 8
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1.5 % ±.1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ± 0.5 Ω out of measured value
Range: 0-250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ±2 Ω out of measured value

Inteli AIN8TC
Inteli AIN8TC module is extension module equipped with 8 analog inputs dedicated for thermocouple sensors
only.
The detection of communication speed is indicated by fast flashing of status LED. Once the speed is detected
the module remains set for the speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of communication speed
detection is done by reset of the module.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 667

DRAFT!

Image 8.137 Inteli AIN8TC

Image 8.138 Inteli AIN8TC dimensions

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 668

DRAFT!

Terminals

ANALOG INPUT 8 analog Inputs

CAN CAN1 line
POWER Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON")
TEST jumper Upgrade of SW
AT-LINK Connector for AT-LINK

Analog inputs
8 channels
can be configured as thermocouple sensors only

Supported sensors

Sensors
Thermocpl J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°C] (fix)

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 669

DRAFT!

Thermocpl (nc) K [°C] (fix)

Thermocpl (nc) L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°F] (fix)

Note: "nc" means not cold junction compensation (by external sensor). In this case is used internal temperature
sensor on the PCB

Address and DIP switch setting

Address configuration
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs.
Programming firmware
Firmware is upgraded via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper TEST.
For programming FlashProg PC tool version 4.2 or higher must be used.

LED indication

LED status Description

Dark FW in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address)
Fast flashing Detection of CAN communication speed
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8TC and
controller works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN
address module doesn't communicate with the controller)

Wiring
Analog inputs

Terminator

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 670

DRAFT!

Technical data

Dimension (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)

Weight 237.5 grams
Interface to controller CAN1

Analog inputs (not electric separated) 8, no galvanic separated

Measuring ±100 mV
Accuracy ± 0.1 % of actual value + ± 100 µV (± 3 °C)
Internal sensor for measuring cold junction - Accuracy ±1 °C in temperature range -20 °C ÷ +70 °C
CANbus is galvanic separated from the
measurement and power supply.
All analog inputs are galvanic separated from
Galvanic separation
power supply.
Analog inputs are not galvanic separated
between channels

Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Protection IP20
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Heat radiation 2W

Thermocouples galvanically separated and galvanically non-separated are supported.

Inteli AIO9/1
Inteli AIO9/1 module is extension module equipped with analog inputs and outputs – designed for DC
measurement.
The detection of communication speed is indicated by fast flashing of status LED. Once the speed is detected
the module remains set for the speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of communication speed
detection is done by reset of the module.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 671

DRAFT!

Image 8.139 Inteli AIO9/1

Image 8.140 Inteli AIO9/1 dimensions

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 672

DRAFT!

Terminals

ANALOG INPUT 9 channels

ANALOG OUTPUTS 1 channel
CAN CAN1 line
POWER Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON")
TEST jumper Upgrade of SW
AT-LINK Connector for AT-LINK (Upgrade of SW)

Analog inputs
4 channels AIN1 – AIN4 can be configured as:
Sensor ±65V (it is determinated for measurement of battery voltage)
4 channels AIN5 – AIN8 can be configured as:
Thermocouples – type J,K or L (in °C or °F)
Sensor ±75mV DC – (for connecting current shunts)
1 channel AIN9 can be configured as:
RTD (Pt1000, Ni1000)
Common resistance 0-2400Ω

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 673

DRAFT!

Analog outputs
1 channel AOUT1. Type of output:
0-10V DC
0-20mA
PWM (5 V, freq 2.4 Hz ÷2.4 kHz)
Analog output has 4-pins connector – GND and one pin for each type of output.
All analog inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.

Supported sensors

Sensors
User curves
PT1000 [°C] (fix)
NI1000 [°C] (fix)
PT1000 [°F] (fix)
NI1000 [°F] (fix)
0-2400 Ω (fix linear)
±65 V DC (fix linear)
±75 mV (fix linear)
Thermocpl J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°F] (fix)

Address and DIP switch setting

Address configuration
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs and outputs.
Programming Firmware
Firmware upgrade is via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper TEST and switch OFF
and switch ON the power supply.
For programming use FlashProg PC tool version 4.4 or higher.

LED indication

LED status Description

Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address)

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 674

DRAFT!

Fast flashing Detection of CAN communication speed

Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8TC and
controller works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN
address module doesn’t communicate with the controller)

Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.

Measuring resistance – AIN9

2 – wire measurement

Ranges: Pt1000, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω.

Analog input 9 is determined for measuring resistance only.

Technical data

Dimension (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)

Power LED

LED status Description

Blinking green The unit is OK and the communication to the master controller is OK.
Blinking red The unit is OK, but the communication to the master controller is not running.
Blinking yellow EEPROM check not passed OK after power on
Yellow Horn timeout or controller address adjustment

Horn setting
The horn output is activated if any of red or yellow LED is on. Output is on until pressing Horn reset or horn
timeout counts down. The timeout can by set by following steps:
Switch to programming mode (Hold the Horn reset and Lamp test when unit is powering on). Status led is
yellow
Press Lamp test fifteen times

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 678

DRAFT!

Set the horn timeout by pressing Horn reset.

The number of green luminous LEDs means timeout in 10 s (any for disabling horn output, 1 for 10s
timeout, 2 for 10s timeout, 15 for disabling horn timeout).
Press Lamp test two times

Note: If there is no operator action during address setting, color adjusting or timeout setting, the unit returns to
normal operation without changes saving.

The horn is activated if:

Some of red or yellow LED lights up or
At the end of the extended lamp test. See chapter Lamp and horn test (page 679)
The horn can be silenced:
By pressing horn reset button or
It silences automatically after adjusted time

Lamp and horn test

Pressing and holding lamp test button for less than 2 s execute the basic lamp test. All LEDs light up with the
configured color. If the button is hold longer than 2 s, an extended test is started. Every LED is tested step-by-
step in green color and then in red color. The horn is activated at the end of the test. After that the unit returns to
normal operation. The horn can be silenced with horn reset.

Wiring

* terminator resistor only when iGL-RA 15 is the last unit on the CAN1 bus.
Note: The shielding of the CAN bus cable has to be grounded at one point only!

Note: See the section Technical data (page 200) for recommended CAN bus cable type.

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 679

DRAFT!

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 0.35-0.1A (+1Amax horn output) depends on supply voltage
Protection IP65
Humidity 85%
Storage temperature -30 °C to +80 °C
Operating temperature -20 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 180 × 120 × 55 mm
Weight 950 g

Horn output
Maximum current 1.0 A
Maximum switching voltage 36 V DC

CAN bus interface

Galvanic separated
Maximal CAN bus length 200 m
Speed 250 kBd
Nominal impedance 120 Ω
Cable type twisted pair (shielded)
Following dynamic cable parameters are important especially for maximal 200 meters CAN bus length
Nominal Velocity of Propagation min. 75 % (max. 4.4 ns/m)
2
Wire crosscut min.0.25 mm
Maximal attenuation (at 1 MHz) 2 dB / 100 m
Recommended Industrial Automation & Process Control Cables
3082A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3083A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3086A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
BELDEN (www.belden.com) 3087A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
3084A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3085A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3105A Paired EIA Industrial RS485 cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Trunk Cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Drop Cable
LAPP CABLE (www.lappcable.com)
Unitronic BUS CAN
Unitronic-FD BUS P CAN UL/CSA

6 back to Appendix

InteliLite 4 AMF 25 1.0.0 Global Guide 680

Intelilite 4 Amf 25 1.6.0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
Intelilite 4 Amf 25 1.6.0 Global Guide
873 pages
ARM Microcontrollers Programming for Embedded Systems
From Everand
ARM Microcontrollers Programming for Embedded Systems
Sever Spanulescu
5/5 (1)
Inteliats2 70 Global Guide
100% (3)
Inteliats2 70 Global Guide
396 pages
Comap Intelilite4 Amf8
No ratings yet
Comap Intelilite4 Amf8
564 pages
InteliLite-AMF25 - Global Guide PDF
100% (4)
InteliLite-AMF25 - Global Guide PDF
661 pages
Intelilite MRS11
No ratings yet
Intelilite MRS11
559 pages
InteliLite 9 Global Guide
100% (1)
InteliLite 9 Global Guide
393 pages
InteliLite MRS16 1 8 0 Global Guide
100% (2)
InteliLite MRS16 1 8 0 Global Guide
724 pages
ComAp Electronic Engines Support For Perkins 2
100% (3)
ComAp Electronic Engines Support For Perkins 2
15 pages
Effect of Home-Based Kegel Exercises On Quality of Life in Women With Stress and Mixed Urinary Incontinence
No ratings yet
Effect of Home-Based Kegel Exercises On Quality of Life in Women With Stress and Mixed Urinary Incontinence
4 pages
KNH 411 Case Study 11
No ratings yet
KNH 411 Case Study 11
20 pages
Peb Steel Structures Tolerance Table As Per Aisc: Builtup/ Hotroll Beams
No ratings yet
Peb Steel Structures Tolerance Table As Per Aisc: Builtup/ Hotroll Beams
2 pages
Intelilite4 Amf8 Global Guide
100% (1)
Intelilite4 Amf8 Global Guide
573 pages
Intelilite4 Amf25 Global Guide
No ratings yet
Intelilite4 Amf25 Global Guide
826 pages
Intelilite 4 Amf 20 1.4.0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
Intelilite 4 Amf 20 1.4.0 Global Guide
633 pages
Intelilite 4 Amf 9 1.4.0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
Intelilite 4 Amf 9 1.4.0 Global Guide
663 pages
InteliLite4-AMF20
No ratings yet
InteliLite4-AMF20
620 pages
InteliLite4 AMF25!1!3 0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
InteliLite4 AMF25!1!3 0 Global Guide
812 pages
Intelilite 4 Amf 8 1.6.0 Global Guide
100% (1)
Intelilite 4 Amf 8 1.6.0 Global Guide
576 pages
Intelilite 4 Amf 9 1.6.0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
Intelilite 4 Amf 9 1.6.0 Global Guide
668 pages
Intelilite 4 Amf 20 1.6.0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
Intelilite 4 Amf 20 1.6.0 Global Guide
638 pages
InteliLite4 AMF9 1 3 0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
InteliLite4 AMF9 1 3 0 Global Guide
614 pages
Intelilite 4 MRS16 Guide
No ratings yet
Intelilite 4 MRS16 Guide
818 pages
InteliLite AMF25 1 7 0 Global Guide PDF
No ratings yet
InteliLite AMF25 1 7 0 Global Guide PDF
741 pages
InteliLite-AMF20 - Global Guide PDF
50% (2)
InteliLite-AMF20 - Global Guide PDF
506 pages
Inteligen4 200 2.2.0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
Inteligen4 200 2.2.0 Global Guide
875 pages
InteliLite 9 1 6 0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
InteliLite 9 1 6 0 Global Guide
416 pages
Intelilite mrs16
No ratings yet
Intelilite mrs16
632 pages
InteliLite AMF25!1!8 0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
InteliLite AMF25!1!8 0 Global Guide
761 pages
InteliLite AMF20 1 9 0 Global Guide - 1
No ratings yet
InteliLite AMF20 1 9 0 Global Guide - 1
597 pages
InteliLite 9 1 3 0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
InteliLite 9 1 3 0 Global Guide
422 pages
InteliLite Telecom DC 1.2.0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
InteliLite Telecom DC 1.2.0 Global Guide
207 pages
InteliGen 500 1 6 0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
InteliGen 500 1 6 0 Global Guide
992 pages
IL-NT-MRS3,4-AMF8,9-2.0-Reference Guide PDF
No ratings yet
IL-NT-MRS3,4-AMF8,9-2.0-Reference Guide PDF
84 pages
IL NT MRS3,4 AMF8,9 2.0 Reference Guide
0% (1)
IL NT MRS3,4 AMF8,9 2.0 Reference Guide
84 pages
Intelineo 6000 1.5.0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
Intelineo 6000 1.5.0 Global Guide
1,417 pages
InteliSys NTC Hybrid 2 2 0 Global Guide 2
No ratings yet
InteliSys NTC Hybrid 2 2 0 Global Guide 2
509 pages
Intelinano Amf 5 Global Guide 2024-08-26
No ratings yet
Intelinano Amf 5 Global Guide 2024-08-26
384 pages
InteliGen 500 1 2 0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
InteliGen 500 1 2 0 Global Guide
940 pages
IL NT MRS3,4 AMF8,9 2.2 Reference Guide
No ratings yet
IL NT MRS3,4 AMF8,9 2.2 Reference Guide
86 pages
ig-ntc-bb 5.1.0 global guide
No ratings yet
ig-ntc-bb 5.1.0 global guide
737 pages
intelimains 510 global guide
No ratings yet
intelimains 510 global guide
753 pages
Mis aportes
No ratings yet
Mis aportes
64 pages
IL NT MRS3,4 AMF8,9 2 2 Reference Guide r2
No ratings yet
IL NT MRS3,4 AMF8,9 2 2 Reference Guide r2
86 pages
InteliGen 1000 - Global Guide
No ratings yet
InteliGen 1000 - Global Guide
1,468 pages
Inteligen 1000 - Global Guide-3.1.0.1
No ratings yet
Inteligen 1000 - Global Guide-3.1.0.1
1,348 pages
IL-AMF-Operator Guide-Short
No ratings yet
IL-AMF-Operator Guide-Short
15 pages
Inteligen 1000 - Global Guide
No ratings yet
Inteligen 1000 - Global Guide
1,316 pages
SGC 1 Overview
No ratings yet
SGC 1 Overview
56 pages
COMAP IL NT Operator - Guide
No ratings yet
COMAP IL NT Operator - Guide
18 pages
Intelidrive Dcu Industrial
No ratings yet
Intelidrive Dcu Industrial
350 pages
InteliLite AMF 2 5
100% (2)
InteliLite AMF 2 5
80 pages
In NT Plus 1.4r2 Reference Guide
No ratings yet
In NT Plus 1.4r2 Reference Guide
91 pages
Intelimains 210-2-1 0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
Intelimains 210-2-1 0 Global Guide
682 pages
Inteliats 70 Global Guide 2023-04-27
No ratings yet
Inteliats 70 Global Guide 2023-04-27
444 pages
ID FPC Global Guide - 3
No ratings yet
ID FPC Global Guide - 3
161 pages
Inteligen 200: Global Guide
No ratings yet
Inteligen 200: Global Guide
824 pages
Start Here Standard Products ComAp PDF
No ratings yet
Start Here Standard Products ComAp PDF
12 pages
Intelisys Gas 2.0.0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
Intelisys Gas 2.0.0 Global Guide
962 pages
InteliGen 200 1 1 0 Global Guide r1
No ratings yet
InteliGen 200 1 1 0 Global Guide r1
853 pages
Intelineo 6000 1.3.0 Global Guide
No ratings yet
Intelineo 6000 1.3.0 Global Guide
1,251 pages
IL-AMF-2.0 r1
No ratings yet
IL-AMF-2.0 r1
73 pages
The Book of I²C: A Guide for Adventurers
From Everand
The Book of I²C: A Guide for Adventurers
Randall Hyde
No ratings yet
Understanding TCP/IP
From Everand
Understanding TCP/IP
Libor DostÃ¡lek
4/5 (2)
10V1600 Functional Specification
No ratings yet
10V1600 Functional Specification
147 pages
ECpvx_user_manual
No ratings yet
ECpvx_user_manual
157 pages
ECpv2_user_manual
No ratings yet
ECpv2_user_manual
122 pages
ComAp Electronic-Engines-Support-for Perkins
100% (1)
ComAp Electronic-Engines-Support-for Perkins
7 pages
HH C888
No ratings yet
HH C888
25 pages
Mason Thesis
No ratings yet
Mason Thesis
264 pages
EasYgen 3000 Rental Option Manual
No ratings yet
EasYgen 3000 Rental Option Manual
748 pages
Emcp4 Ai PDF
100% (4)
Emcp4 Ai PDF
83 pages
Elemental Quantum Mechanics: Outline
No ratings yet
Elemental Quantum Mechanics: Outline
21 pages
Thesis Tuvaaq
No ratings yet
Thesis Tuvaaq
169 pages
A Biomimetic Snake-Like Robot Using Bioloids
No ratings yet
A Biomimetic Snake-Like Robot Using Bioloids
35 pages
Copy of Ol_Ig Chemical Energetics Notes 2025
No ratings yet
Copy of Ol_Ig Chemical Energetics Notes 2025
20 pages
Geo Mock
No ratings yet
Geo Mock
7 pages
TIT FOR TAT in Sticklebacks and The Evolution of Cooperation
No ratings yet
TIT FOR TAT in Sticklebacks and The Evolution of Cooperation
3 pages
ALtivar Broshure
No ratings yet
ALtivar Broshure
7 pages
Song Sheet
100% (16)
Song Sheet
2 pages
PBL 1R
No ratings yet
PBL 1R
2 pages
Hawaiian Roller Coaster Ride
100% (1)
Hawaiian Roller Coaster Ride
2 pages
(V6e) Tanya, The Sorceress PDF
No ratings yet
(V6e) Tanya, The Sorceress PDF
18 pages
Linear Equations Worksheet
No ratings yet
Linear Equations Worksheet
2 pages
Engineering mechanics_Jaspal Sir Unacademy-1
No ratings yet
Engineering mechanics_Jaspal Sir Unacademy-1
37 pages
MEGGER PD Presentation PDF
100% (1)
MEGGER PD Presentation PDF
91 pages
OEM719 Product Sheet GPS
No ratings yet
OEM719 Product Sheet GPS
2 pages
A Fuzzy Bayesian Network Approach For Risk Analysis in Process Industries
No ratings yet
A Fuzzy Bayesian Network Approach For Risk Analysis in Process Industries
25 pages
Lesson 13 146 147: I K A Genki II I K A Genki II
No ratings yet
Lesson 13 146 147: I K A Genki II I K A Genki II
3 pages
Tos Microproject
No ratings yet
Tos Microproject
10 pages
Digital Audio အကြောင်းသိစရာ - Part 1 and 2
No ratings yet
Digital Audio အကြောင်းသိစရာ - Part 1 and 2
50 pages
Yara International School - Riyadh Worksheet: Safety First Safety First
No ratings yet
Yara International School - Riyadh Worksheet: Safety First Safety First
3 pages
The Xtal Set Society Newsletter
No ratings yet
The Xtal Set Society Newsletter
17 pages
Nasruddin
No ratings yet
Nasruddin
216 pages
Book List
No ratings yet
Book List
7 pages
34-ST-03-149.pdf Manifold Tech Spec
No ratings yet
34-ST-03-149.pdf Manifold Tech Spec
33 pages
Putnam 2021 Problems and Solutions
No ratings yet
Putnam 2021 Problems and Solutions
17 pages
With Motorola GM338 Conventional Mobile
No ratings yet
With Motorola GM338 Conventional Mobile
2 pages
Judge Floro's 15 Pages, April 1, 2011 Supplemental Omnibus Motions - Part 2
No ratings yet
Judge Floro's 15 Pages, April 1, 2011 Supplemental Omnibus Motions - Part 2
16 pages
GP25A/G GP25S/G: Scheda Tecnica / Technical Data Sheet / Fiche Tecnique / Ficha Tecnica
No ratings yet
GP25A/G GP25S/G: Scheda Tecnica / Technical Data Sheet / Fiche Tecnique / Ficha Tecnica
6 pages
CH 1-5 OM
No ratings yet
CH 1-5 OM
71 pages
Lesson 4-Linear Systems
No ratings yet
Lesson 4-Linear Systems
34 pages